1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
247 \begin_inset Note Note
250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
252 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
253 Document Notes and Questions
256 \begin_layout Itemize
258 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
259 The menu selection Navigate
261 \SpecialChar menuseparator
264 Bookmarks does not appear to work as described
267 \begin_layout Itemize
269 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
270 Would love to see some kind of diagram showing how classes, modules, layouts,
271 or whatever else all relate.
272 It is not clear how all of these things work together.
275 \begin_layout Itemize
277 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
278 Change tracking does not appear to work in equations
286 is a document preparation system.
287 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
288 scripts, publishable books, business
289 letters and proposals,
290 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
294 It is unlike most other
295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
304 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
320 pt type, left justified, 5
321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
330 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
340 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
344 \begin_layout Standard
349 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
350 's philosophy: most importantly,
351 the format of all of the manuals.
352 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
353 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
354 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
357 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
364 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
366 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
367 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
373 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
374 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
376 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
377 only a vertical scrollbar.
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
382 The first case is large images.
383 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
384 the image and use the option
395 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
398 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
401 \begin_layout Standard
402 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
403 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
411 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
418 \begin_layout Section
422 \begin_layout Standard
423 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
425 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
427 Just select the manual you want to read from the
434 \begin_layout Section
435 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
439 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
448 can be configured via the menu
450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
454 \begin_inset Index idx
457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
464 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
467 packages are available.
468 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
470 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
471 was installed on your system,
472 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
477 \begin_inset space \space{}
480 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
483 To force \SpecialChar LyX
484 to re-inspect your system use
486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 \begin_inset Index idx
493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
494 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
500 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
501 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
504 \begin_layout Section
507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
509 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
516 \begin_layout Standard
517 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
518 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 installed but you will not be
521 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
522 or print your documents
526 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
527 Some \SpecialChar LyX
528 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
537 which can produce PDFs and the like.
540 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
542 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
545 every \SpecialChar LyX
546 document can still be output as plain text
547 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
553 \begin_layout Standard
554 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
556 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
560 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
561 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
564 \begin_layout Standard
565 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
566 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
567 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
570 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
578 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
579 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
586 \begin_inset Index idx
589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
590 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
598 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
605 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
609 \begin_layout Chapter
610 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
614 \begin_layout Section
615 Basic File Operations
616 \begin_inset Index idx
619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
628 \begin_layout Standard
633 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
634 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
637 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-new-template"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
715 \begin_layout Itemize
717 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
729 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
745 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
755 \begin_layout Itemize
777 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
815 \begin_layout Itemize
829 \begin_layout Itemize
843 \begin_layout Standard
844 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
845 few minor differences.
848 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
859 command lists the available templates.
860 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
862 and possibly propose text fragments
864 for the document, features
865 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
868 you would otherwise need to
869 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
871 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
875 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
879 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
887 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
893 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
894 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
939 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
940 to open a file or create a new one, that big
941 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
945 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
960 \begin_layout Standard
982 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
984 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
987 people work on the same document at the same time.
991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
995 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1000 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1001 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1003 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1005 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1010 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1011 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1020 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1025 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1033 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1048 \begin_inset space ~
1053 will reload the document from disk.
1054 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1055 and want to restore it to the last save
1056 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1063 \begin_inset space ~
1068 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1069 them as your changes.
1072 \begin_layout Section
1073 Basic Editing Features
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1086 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1093 \begin_layout Standard
1094 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1095 can perform cut and paste operations
1096 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1097 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1098 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1099 editing features and how to access
1101 We will start with cut and paste.
1104 \begin_layout Standard
1105 As you might expect, the
1109 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1110 various other editing features.
1111 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1115 \begin_layout Itemize
1121 \begin_inset Index idx
1124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 \begin_layout Itemize
1159 \begin_inset Index idx
1162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1191 \begin_layout Itemize
1197 \begin_inset Index idx
1200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1225 \begin_layout Itemize
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1235 \begin_layout Itemize
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_layout Itemize
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset Index idx
1262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 \begin_inset Index idx
1274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1289 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1299 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1305 \begin_layout Standard
1306 The first three are self-explanatory.
1307 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1308 and other programs using
1329 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1330 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1335 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1336 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1337 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1338 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1339 into individual cells.
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1348 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1349 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1353 \begin_layout Standard
1357 \begin_inset space ~
1362 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1364 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1366 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1379 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1380 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1381 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1387 \begin_inset space \space{}
1390 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1391 text which is often meaningless.)
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1398 \begin_inset space ~
1401 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1403 \begin_inset space ~
1407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1420 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1421 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1422 is inserted as one paragraph.
1423 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1427 \begin_inset space ~
1432 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1433 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1439 \begin_inset space ~
1442 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1448 \begin_inset space ~
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1459 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1462 paste from the primary selection.
1463 This is normally the currently selected text.
1466 \begin_layout Standard
1469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1475 \begin_inset space ~
1483 \begin_inset space ~
1487 \begin_inset space ~
1493 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1499 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1502 \begin_inset space ~
1511 \begin_inset space ~
1516 button to skip the curren
1517 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1521 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1528 \begin_inset space ~
1533 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1537 \begin_inset space ~
1542 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1544 If the toggle is set, searching for
1545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1556 will not match the word
1557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 Match whole words only
1573 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1574 to only find complete words, e.
1575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1579 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 also offers an advanced
1611 \begin_inset space ~
1615 \begin_inset space ~
1620 feature that is described in section
1621 \begin_inset space ~
1625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1627 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1636 \begin_inset space \space{}
1640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1648 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1650 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1655 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1666 arg "inset-select-all"
1669 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1670 When the cursor is inside an inset
1673 arg "inset-select-all"
1676 selects the content of the inset.
1680 arg "inset-select-all"
1683 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1684 then to the whole document.
1688 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1691 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1695 \begin_layout Section
1697 \begin_inset Index idx
1700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1707 \begin_inset Index idx
1710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1719 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1727 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1729 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1735 or the toolbar button
1742 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 or the toolbar button
1754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1761 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1765 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1778 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1779 This is a consequence of the 100
1780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1783 step undo limit mentioned above.
1786 \begin_layout Standard
1795 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1797 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1801 \begin_layout Section
1803 \begin_inset Index idx
1806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1819 \begin_layout Enumerate
1824 \begin_layout Itemize
1829 once anywhere in the edit window.
1830 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1834 \begin_layout Enumerate
1839 \begin_layout Itemize
1846 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1849 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1852 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1853 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1855 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1856 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1862 \begin_layout Itemize
1863 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1873 \begin_layout Enumerate
1874 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1878 \begin_layout Standard
1879 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1880 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1884 \begin_layout Section
1886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1888 name "sec:Navigating"
1893 \begin_inset Index idx
1896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1905 \begin_layout Standard
1907 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1910 \begin_layout Itemize
1915 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1916 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1919 \begin_layout Itemize
1920 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1922 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1924 \begin_inset space ~
1929 or by the toolbar button
1932 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1938 \begin_layout Itemize
1939 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1941 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1944 and use the same menu to return to them.
1945 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1952 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1957 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1958 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1960 \begin_inset space ~
1965 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1966 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1967 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1968 last editing position.
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1976 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Subsection
1982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1984 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1989 \begin_inset Index idx
1992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 Navigating ! Outline
1999 \begin_inset Index idx
2002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_layout Standard
2012 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2013 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2014 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2015 \begin_inset space ~
2019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2021 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2025 ), notes, or citations (see section
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2037 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2041 \begin_layout Standard
2042 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2043 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2044 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2045 dialog and to modify the citation.
2048 \begin_layout Standard
2053 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2054 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2056 Labels and References
2058 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2067 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2070 \begin_layout Standard
2071 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2072 control the display.
2077 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2078 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2083 option keeps it in the current view state.
2084 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2085 \begin_inset space ~
2088 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2089 \begin_inset space ~
2092 3, the subsections of sections
2093 \begin_inset space ~
2096 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2101 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2102 \begin_inset space ~
2106 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2116 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2119 \begin_layout Standard
2126 button refreshes the TOC (
2127 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2129 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2133 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2135 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2139 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2153 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2157 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2165 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2169 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2173 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2175 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2179 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2183 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2187 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2191 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2195 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2199 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2203 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2207 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2209 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2213 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2227 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2228 For example, you can move section
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2236 2.4 or after section
2237 \begin_inset space ~
2242 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2255 (or the corresponding key bindings
2263 ) you can change the level of sections.
2264 You can make section
2265 \begin_inset space ~
2269 \begin_inset space ~
2273 \begin_inset space ~
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2281 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2284 \begin_layout Subsection
2285 Horizontal Scrolling
2286 \begin_inset Index idx
2289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2290 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2298 \begin_layout Standard
2300 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2305 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2306 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2307 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2311 \begin_layout Standard
2312 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2316 \begin_layout Itemize
2318 is used on a small tablet computer
2321 \begin_layout Itemize
2322 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2334 \begin_inset space ~
2347 \begin_layout Itemize
2348 Math constructs with long command names
2351 \begin_layout Standard
2352 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2353 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2355 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2356 window so that table
2357 \begin_inset space ~
2361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2363 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2368 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2370 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2371 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2374 \begin_layout Standard
2375 \begin_inset Float table
2382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2383 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2388 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2392 Horizontal scrolling test.
2400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2402 \begin_inset Tabular
2403 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2404 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2405 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2449 \begin_layout Section
2450 Input/Word Completion
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2453 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2458 \begin_inset Index idx
2461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2468 \begin_inset Index idx
2471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2502 \begin_layout Standard
2504 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2506 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2507 is used to propose completions.
2510 \begin_layout Standard
2511 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2519 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2526 \begin_inset space ~
2530 \begin_inset space ~
2535 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2539 \begin_inset space ~
2544 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2545 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2555 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2556 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2557 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2558 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2561 \begin_layout Standard
2563 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2564 completions available.
2569 key to accept a proposed completion.
2570 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2571 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2572 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2575 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2582 \begin_layout Standard
2583 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2584 ing options for text.
2586 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2588 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2590 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2593 he special math option
2597 enables characters to be composed.
2599 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2601 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2605 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2608 you want to insert the character
2609 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2613 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2616 input the characters
2617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2629 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2635 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2637 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2642 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2644 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2647 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2650 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2652 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2655 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2660 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2662 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2666 's installation folder.
2668 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2669 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2676 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2681 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2682 In the example above,
2687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2719 \begin_layout Section
2721 \begin_inset Index idx
2724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_inset Index idx
2734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2763 \begin_inset Index idx
2766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2797 \begin_layout Standard
2798 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2812 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2815 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2819 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2820 \begin_inset space ~
2824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2826 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2833 \begin_layout Standard
2837 \begin_inset space ~
2845 \begin_inset space ~
2866 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2870 \begin_layout Labeling
2871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2875 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2876 LatexCommand nomenclature
2878 description "Tabulator key"
2885 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2887 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2888 \begin_inset space ~
2892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2894 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2901 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2905 , especially section
2906 \begin_inset space ~
2910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2912 reference "subsec:Lists"
2918 If you are still confused, look in the
2923 \begin_inset Newline newline
2931 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2932 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2936 \begin_layout Labeling
2937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2941 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2942 LatexCommand nomenclature
2944 description "Escape key"
2952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2959 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2960 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2963 \begin_layout Labeling
2964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2969 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2970 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2974 \begin_layout Standard
2975 There are three modifier keys:
2978 \begin_layout Labeling
2979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2997 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2998 LatexCommand nomenclature
3000 description "Control key"
3005 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3006 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3010 \begin_layout Itemize
3019 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3022 \begin_layout Itemize
3031 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3034 \begin_layout Itemize
3043 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3047 \begin_layout Labeling
3048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3067 LatexCommand nomenclature
3069 description "Shift key"
3074 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3075 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3078 \begin_layout Labeling
3079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3097 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3098 LatexCommand nomenclature
3100 description "Alt or Meta key"
3105 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3106 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3107 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3113 \begin_inset Newline newline
3116 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3118 menu accelerator keys
3121 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3122 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3126 \begin_layout Standard
3127 For example, the sequence
3128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3134 \begin_inset space ~
3138 \begin_inset space ~
3144 \begin_inset space ~
3152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3171 \begin_inset space ~
3177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3192 manual lists all other things bound to the
3200 \begin_layout Standard
3201 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3203 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3205 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3206 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3208 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3209 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3210 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3212 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3228 followed by a capital
3235 \begin_layout Chapter
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 \begin_layout Section
3253 \begin_inset Index idx
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3265 \begin_layout Subsection
3269 \begin_layout Standard
3270 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3271 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3272 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3273 numbering schemes, and so on.
3274 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3275 and format the title of your document differently.
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3283 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3284 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3285 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3286 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3287 picks one for you by default.
3288 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3291 \begin_layout Subsection
3293 \begin_inset Index idx
3296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3305 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3312 \begin_layout Standard
3313 You can select a class using the
3315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3320 \begin_inset Index idx
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3330 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3338 \begin_layout Standard
3339 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3344 \begin_layout Description
3345 Article for basic articles
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 Report for basic reports
3352 \begin_layout Description
3353 Book for writing a book
3356 \begin_layout Description
3357 Letter for US-style letters
3360 \begin_layout Standard
3361 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3362 only uses if you have installed
3363 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 distributions will include
3367 Here are some of the classes.
3368 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3370 Special Document Classes
3379 \begin_layout Description
3380 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3383 \begin_layout Description
3384 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3388 \begin_layout Description
3389 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3393 \begin_layout Description
3394 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3395 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3396 There are three article layouts available.
3397 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3398 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3399 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3400 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3405 sequential numbering
3406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3409 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3410 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3411 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3412 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 Beamer Layout for presentations
3419 \begin_layout Description
3420 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3421 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3422 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3423 with \SpecialChar LyX
3427 \begin_layout Description
3428 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3431 \begin_layout Description
3433 \begin_inset space ~
3436 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3439 \begin_layout Description
3440 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3443 \begin_layout Description
3444 Foils Used to make transparencies
3447 \begin_layout Description
3448 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3449 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3450 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3451 with \SpecialChar LyX
3455 \begin_layout Description
3456 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3457 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3460 \begin_layout Description
3461 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3464 \begin_layout Description
3465 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3468 \begin_layout Description
3469 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3470 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3471 (Is used by this document.)
3474 \begin_layout Description
3475 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3478 \begin_layout Description
3479 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3482 \begin_layout Description
3487 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3488 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3490 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3494 \begin_layout Description
3495 Slides Used to make transparencies
3498 \begin_layout Description
3500 \begin_inset space ~
3503 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3504 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3507 \begin_layout Description
3508 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3511 \begin_layout Standard
3512 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3514 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3516 Special Document Classes
3523 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3524 of the document classes.
3527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3531 \begin_layout Standard
3532 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3537 \begin_inset Index idx
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3557 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3558 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3560 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3563 \begin_layout Standard
3566 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3571 , are highly specialized.
3573 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3574 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3575 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3576 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3577 by some document class.
3578 There are just too many of them.
3579 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3582 \begin_layout Standard
3583 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3591 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3592 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3593 document class for a new file.
3595 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3598 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3605 manual for information on how to install them.
3606 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3612 \begin_layout Standard
3613 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3614 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3615 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3616 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3617 class files to be used for dissertation
3618 s submitted to those universities.
3619 The \SpecialChar LyX
3620 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3622 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3626 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3632 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3639 name "subsec:Modules"
3644 \begin_inset Index idx
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3656 \begin_layout Standard
3657 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3658 chosen document class.
3659 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3660 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3671 \begin_inset Index idx
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3685 \begin_layout Standard
3686 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3687 packages or file format converters that are not always
3688 installed by default.
3690 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3691 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3692 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3693 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3695 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3696 file without the missing prerequisites.
3697 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3698 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3705 \begin_inset Index idx
3708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3709 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3716 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3720 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3724 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3733 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3735 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3746 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3749 \begin_layout Standard
3750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3758 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3760 will advise you about these things.
3768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3772 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3777 \begin_inset Index idx
3780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 Document ! Local Layout
3789 \begin_layout Standard
3790 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3791 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3792 : They are intended to be used in
3793 a variety of different documents.
3794 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3795 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3796 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3797 need a specific inset or
3798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3800 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3803 style only that one time.
3804 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3806 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3824 manual for information on how to use it.
3827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3831 \begin_layout Standard
3832 Each class has a default set of options.
3833 Here's a quick table describing them:
3836 \begin_layout Standard
3837 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3843 \begin_layout Standard
3845 \begin_inset Tabular
3846 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3847 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3848 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3849 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3850 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3851 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 \begin_layout Standard
4307 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4313 \begin_layout Standard
4314 You're probably also wondering what
4315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4319 \begin_inset space ~
4323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4327 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4328 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4333 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4338 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4348 headings, there are also
4356 headings, and so on.
4357 We will describe these headings fully in section
4358 \begin_inset space ~
4362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4364 reference "subsec:Headings"
4371 \begin_layout Subsection
4373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4375 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4380 \begin_inset Index idx
4383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4390 \begin_inset Index idx
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4402 \begin_layout Standard
4403 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4412 \begin_inset space ~
4420 \begin_inset space ~
4425 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4427 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4428 doesn't support special options you want to
4429 use for your document.
4430 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4431 -class and its options, you have to read
4435 \begin_layout Standard
4437 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4441 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4445 \begin_inset space ~
4452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4458 \begin_inset space ~
4463 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4464 You can choose between the following five options:
4467 \begin_layout Labeling
4468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4473 Use default page style of current class.
4476 \begin_layout Labeling
4477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4482 No page numbers or headings.
4485 \begin_layout Labeling
4486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4494 \begin_layout Labeling
4495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4500 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4501 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4502 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4503 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4506 \begin_layout Labeling
4507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4512 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4513 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4519 \begin_inset Index idx
4522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 How they are defined is explained in section
4531 \begin_inset space ~
4535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4537 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4552 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4559 \begin_layout Subsection
4560 Paper Size and Orientation
4561 \begin_inset Index idx
4564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 Document ! Paper size
4571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4573 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4580 \begin_layout Standard
4581 You can find the following options in the menu
4584 \begin_inset space ~
4591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset Index idx
4598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4607 \begin_layout Labeling
4608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4612 \begin_inset space ~
4617 What size paper to print on.
4622 \begin_layout Itemize
4628 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Itemize
4640 \begin_layout Itemize
4646 \begin_layout Itemize
4649 US letter, US legal, US executive
4652 \begin_layout Itemize
4658 \begin_layout Itemize
4665 \begin_layout Labeling
4666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4671 To choose whether to output as
4682 \begin_layout Labeling
4683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4687 \begin_inset space ~
4692 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4693 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4696 \begin_layout Subsection
4698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4700 name "subsec:Margins"
4705 \begin_inset Index idx
4708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 \begin_inset Index idx
4718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4727 \begin_layout Standard
4728 Paper margins are set in the menu
4730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4734 \begin_inset Index idx
4737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4746 \begin_layout Standard
4747 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4748 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4749 the paper format and the font size into account.
4752 \begin_layout Subsection
4756 \begin_layout Standard
4757 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4758 has to convert everything into the new
4760 That includes the paragraph environments.
4761 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4762 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4763 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4765 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4774 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4776 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4777 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4778 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4781 \begin_layout Section
4782 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4783 \begin_inset Index idx
4786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4787 Paragraph ! Indentation
4795 \begin_layout Subsection
4797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4799 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4807 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4808 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4811 \begin_layout Standard
4812 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4813 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4814 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4815 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4819 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4825 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4826 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4827 language than English.
4829 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4832 \begin_layout Standard
4833 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4834 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4835 into \SpecialChar LyX
4837 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4840 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4842 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4843 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4844 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4851 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4852 goes to produce a printable file.
4857 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4859 gives you the ability globally to change
4863 these pre-coded spacings.
4864 We will explain more later.
4867 \begin_layout Subsection
4868 Paragraph Separation
4869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4871 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4876 \begin_inset Index idx
4879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4880 Paragraph ! Separation
4888 \begin_layout Standard
4896 \begin_inset space ~
4904 \begin_inset space ~
4911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4915 \begin_inset Index idx
4918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4924 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4927 \begin_layout Subsection
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4937 \begin_inset space ~
4942 dialog and toggle the
4945 \begin_inset space ~
4950 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4953 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4957 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4958 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4964 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4967 \begin_layout Subsection
4969 \begin_inset Index idx
4972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4973 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4988 \begin_inset Index idx
4991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5000 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5004 \begin_inset space ~
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5014 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5020 \begin_inset Index idx
5023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 installed to use this feature.
5035 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5037 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5039 \begin_inset space ~
5044 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5045 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5048 \begin_layout Section
5049 Paragraph Environments
5050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5052 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5057 \begin_inset Index idx
5060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5061 Paragraph ! Environments
5067 \begin_inset Index idx
5070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5071 Paragraph environments|(
5079 \begin_layout Subsection
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5087 \begin_layout Standard
5096 } \SpecialChar ldots
5106 \begin_inset Newline newline
5109 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5111 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5112 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5113 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5122 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5125 \begin_layout Standard
5126 A paragraph environment is simply a
5127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5134 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5135 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5136 scheme, labels, and so on.
5137 Additionally, you can
5138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5145 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5146 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5147 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5148 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5150 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5152 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5157 \begin_inset Graphics
5158 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5164 at the left end of the toolbar.
5166 will change the environment of the
5170 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5171 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5172 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5175 \begin_layout Standard
5184 create a new paragraph using the
5188 paragraph environment.
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5197 because if you are in one of these environments:
5200 \begin_layout Itemize
5206 \begin_layout Itemize
5212 \begin_layout Itemize
5218 \begin_layout Itemize
5224 \begin_layout Itemize
5230 \begin_layout Itemize
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 \begin_layout Standard
5244 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5248 , rather than resetting it to
5253 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5254 \begin_inset space ~
5258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5260 reference "sec:Nesting"
5267 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 \begin_layout Standard
5272 The default paragraph environment is
5277 It creates a plain paragraph.
5279 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5280 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5281 this manual) are in the
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 You can nest a paragraph using the
5293 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5301 \begin_layout Subsection
5303 \begin_inset Index idx
5306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5317 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5326 for thanks or contact information.
5327 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5328 places all of this on a separate page
5329 along with today's date.
5330 For other types of documents, the title
5331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5338 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5341 \begin_layout Standard
5343 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5357 Here's how you use them:
5360 \begin_layout Itemize
5361 Put the title of your document in the
5368 \begin_layout Itemize
5369 Put the author name in the
5376 \begin_layout Itemize
5377 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5378 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5384 Note that using this environment is optional.
5385 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5386 will automatically insert today's date.
5387 If you don't want a date, use the option
5389 Suppress default date on front page
5393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5396 \begin_inset space ~
5404 \begin_layout Standard
5405 You can use footnotes to insert
5406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5413 or contact information.
5416 \begin_layout Subsection
5418 \begin_inset Index idx
5421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5430 name "subsec:Headings"
5437 \begin_layout Standard
5438 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5440 takes care of the numbering for you.
5443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5449 Section headings ! Numbered
5457 \begin_layout Standard
5458 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5462 \begin_layout Enumerate
5468 \begin_layout Enumerate
5474 \begin_layout Enumerate
5480 \begin_layout Enumerate
5486 \begin_layout Enumerate
5492 \begin_layout Enumerate
5498 \begin_layout Enumerate
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5506 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5507 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5508 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5509 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5511 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5513 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5520 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5521 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5522 You group the book into chapters.
5524 does a similar grouping:
5527 \begin_layout Itemize
5532 is divided into either
5543 \begin_layout Itemize
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5567 \begin_layout Itemize
5579 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 \begin_layout Itemize
5603 \begin_layout Standard
5604 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5612 Not all document types use the
5616 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5621 is the top-level heading.
5629 \begin_layout Standard
5634 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5635 labels it with its number,
5636 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5638 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5650 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5652 \begin_inset Index idx
5655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5656 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 The unnumbered section headings have a
5666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5673 at the end of their name.
5674 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5675 the table of contents, see section
5676 \begin_inset space ~
5680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5690 Changing the Numbering
5691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5693 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5701 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5702 in the Table of Contents.
5703 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5705 Just as certain classes start with
5719 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5729 This is something you can change.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5739 \begin_inset Index idx
5742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5751 \begin_inset space ~
5755 \begin_inset space ~
5760 you will see two counters.
5765 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5766 numbers a section heading.
5767 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5772 Short Titles of Headings
5773 \begin_inset Index idx
5776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5777 Section headings ! Short titles
5783 \begin_inset Argument 1
5786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5795 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5804 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5805 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5806 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5811 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5812 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5813 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5814 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5819 \begin_inset space ~
5825 This will insert a box labeled
5826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5830 \begin_inset space ~
5834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5837 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5838 This also works for captions inside floats.
5839 There can only be one short title per title.
5842 \begin_layout Standard
5843 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5850 \begin_layout Standard
5851 The following information applies to all section headings:
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5859 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5862 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5867 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5870 \begin_layout Subsection
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5876 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5890 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5891 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5892 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5893 the text they contain.
5894 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5902 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5905 \begin_layout Standard
5906 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5915 when you start a new paragraph.
5916 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5920 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5921 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5922 have to change back to the
5926 environment yourself.
5929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5938 \begin_inset Index idx
5941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5950 \begin_layout Standard
5951 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5952 time for the differences.
5961 are identical except for one difference:
5965 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5974 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 Here's an example of the
5991 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5993 See – no indentation!
5997 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5998 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5999 the other paragraph.
6002 \begin_layout Standard
6003 Here's another example, this time in the
6010 \begin_layout Quotation
6016 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6017 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6018 the first line, then
6022 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6026 you were quoting other text.
6029 \begin_layout Quotation
6030 Here's a new paragraph.
6031 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6032 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6035 \begin_layout Standard
6036 As the examples show,
6040 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6041 They should put quotes in the
6046 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6050 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6055 \begin_inset Index idx
6058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6065 \begin_inset Index idx
6068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6089 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6095 \begin_inset Newline newline
6098 Which I did not rehearse!
6102 It could be much worse.
6103 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6105 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6106 indented a bit more than the first.
6107 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6113 \begin_inset Newline newline
6116 And make things look fine
6117 \begin_inset Newline newline
6123 arg "newline-insert newline"
6129 \begin_layout Standard
6134 does not indent both margins.
6135 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6136 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6139 arg "newline-insert newline"
6145 \begin_layout Subsection
6147 \begin_inset Index idx
6150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6168 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6178 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6179 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6188 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6189 lets you provide your own label.
6190 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6191 describing some general features of all four of them.
6194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6198 \begin_layout Standard
6199 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6201 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6202 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6211 reset the environment to
6215 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6216 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6217 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6221 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6225 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6233 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6234 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6235 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6237 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6238 you read all of section
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6245 reference "sec:Nesting"
6252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6254 \begin_inset Index idx
6257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6274 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6278 paragraph environment.
6279 It has the following properties:
6282 \begin_layout Itemize
6283 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6287 \begin_layout Itemize
6289 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6292 \begin_layout Itemize
6293 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6297 \begin_layout Itemize
6298 The items can have any length.
6300 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6301 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6308 \begin_layout Itemize
6313 environment inside another
6317 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6321 \begin_layout Itemize
6322 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6325 \begin_layout Itemize
6327 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6330 \begin_layout Itemize
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6338 reference "sec:Nesting"
6342 for a full explanation of nesting.
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6356 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6360 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6361 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6364 \begin_layout Itemize
6365 The label for the first level
6369 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6373 \begin_layout Itemize
6374 The label for the second level is a dash.
6378 \begin_layout Itemize
6379 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6383 \begin_layout Itemize
6384 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6388 \begin_layout Itemize
6389 Back out to the third level.
6393 \begin_layout Itemize
6394 Back to the second level.
6398 \begin_layout Itemize
6399 Back to the outermost level.
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 These are the default labels for an
6408 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6413 dialog in the submenu
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6427 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6431 \begin_layout Standard
6432 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6433 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6441 reference "sec:Nesting"
6448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6450 \begin_inset Index idx
6453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6462 name "sec:Enumerate"
6469 \begin_layout Standard
6474 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6475 It has these properties:
6478 \begin_layout Enumerate
6479 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6490 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6493 \begin_layout Enumerate
6498 environment resets the counter to one.
6501 \begin_layout Enumerate
6514 \begin_layout Enumerate
6515 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6516 Items can have any length.
6519 \begin_layout Enumerate
6520 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6523 \begin_layout Enumerate
6524 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6527 \begin_layout Enumerate
6528 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6541 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6543 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6544 labels the four different levels in an
6551 \begin_layout Enumerate
6552 The first level of an
6556 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6560 \begin_layout Enumerate
6561 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6565 \begin_layout Enumerate
6566 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6570 \begin_layout Enumerate
6571 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6574 \begin_layout Enumerate
6575 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6580 \begin_layout Enumerate
6581 Back to the third level
6585 \begin_layout Enumerate
6586 Back to the second level.
6590 \begin_layout Enumerate
6591 Back to the outermost level.
6594 \begin_layout Standard
6595 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6599 environment, see section
6600 \begin_inset space ~
6604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6606 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6611 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6615 \begin_layout Standard
6616 There is more to nesting
6620 environments than we've stated here.
6621 You should read section
6622 \begin_inset space ~
6626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6628 reference "sec:Nesting"
6632 to learn more about nesting.
6635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6637 \begin_inset Index idx
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 \begin_layout Standard
6650 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6654 list has no fixed label.
6655 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6664 of the first line as the label.
6668 \begin_layout Description
6669 Example: This is an example of the
6676 \begin_layout Standard
6678 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6691 it is meant that the first usage of the
6695 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6697 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6705 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6713 \begin_inset space ~
6719 \begin_inset space ~
6723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6725 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6729 for more information.) Here is an example:
6732 \begin_layout Description
6734 \begin_inset space ~
6737 Example: This one shows how to use a
6740 \begin_inset space ~
6752 \begin_layout Description
6753 Usage: You should use the
6757 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6758 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6760 It's not a good idea to use a
6764 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6765 You're better off using
6777 paragraphs into them.
6780 \begin_layout Description
6781 Nesting: You can nest
6785 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6790 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6791 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6792 them from the first line.
6795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6797 \begin_inset Index idx
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6814 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6815 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6828 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6830 Here are its properties:
6833 \begin_layout Labeling
6834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6836 \begin_inset space ~
6839 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6848 of each line as the item label.
6853 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6854 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6855 space as described above.
6858 \begin_layout Labeling
6859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6860 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6861 uses different margins for the item label and the
6862 body of the item text.
6863 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6864 label width plus a little extra space.
6867 \begin_layout Labeling
6868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6870 \begin_inset space ~
6873 width \SpecialChar LyX
6874 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6875 If the label width is larger, the label
6876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6883 into the first line.
6884 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6885 margin of the rest of the item text.
6888 \begin_layout Labeling
6889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6891 \begin_inset space ~
6894 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6899 environment has the same left margin.
6900 \begin_inset Newline newline
6903 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6908 \begin_inset space ~
6913 dialog (toolbar button
6916 arg "layout-paragraph"
6923 \begin_inset space ~
6928 determines the default label width.
6929 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6938 multiple times instead.
6939 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6949 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6952 \begin_inset space ~
6957 every time you alter a label in a
6962 \begin_inset Newline newline
6965 The predefined default width is the length of
6966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6974 \begin_inset space ~
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6985 list the same way as the
6989 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6995 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7004 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7005 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7007 \begin_inset space ~
7011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7013 reference "sec:Nesting"
7017 to learn about nesting.
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7021 There is yet another feature of the
7025 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7026 left-justifies the item labels by
7028 You can use additional
7032 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7033 justifies the item label.
7038 are documented in section
7039 \begin_inset space ~
7043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7045 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7050 Here are some examples:
7053 \begin_layout Labeling
7054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7055 Left The default for
7062 \begin_layout Labeling
7063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7064 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7071 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7074 \begin_layout Labeling
7075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7076 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7080 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7087 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7090 \begin_layout Subsection
7092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7094 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7099 \begin_inset Index idx
7102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 The features described in this section require that the module
7114 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7116 is loaded in the document settings.
7117 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7123 \begin_inset Index idx
7126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7137 Custom Enumerate Lists
7138 \begin_inset Index idx
7141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7150 \begin_layout Standard
7152 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7158 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7159 There you add the command
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7184 Code, look at section
7185 \begin_inset space ~
7189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7191 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7204 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7211 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7212 For capital Roman numerals replace
7224 in the command above.
7225 For Arabic numerals use
7233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7240 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 You can only number 26
7266 \begin_inset space ~
7269 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7278 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7279 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7282 \begin_layout Standard
7283 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7286 \begin_layout Enumerate
7287 \begin_inset Argument 1
7290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_inset Argument 1
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7343 \begin_layout Enumerate
7348 \begin_layout Enumerate
7349 \begin_inset Argument 1
7352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7376 \begin_layout Enumerate
7377 \begin_inset Argument 1
7380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7406 \begin_layout Standard
7407 For this list these commands were used:
7410 \begin_layout Standard
7421 \begin_inset Newline newline
7429 \begin_inset Newline newline
7437 \begin_inset Newline newline
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7454 makes the label emphasized and
7463 \begin_layout Standard
7464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7472 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7473 lists until you change the definition.
7481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7483 \begin_inset Index idx
7486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7487 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7495 \begin_layout Standard
7496 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7499 \begin_layout Enumerate
7500 \begin_inset Argument 1
7503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7522 \begin_inset Note Note
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 goes back to default numbering
7534 \begin_layout Enumerate
7538 \begin_layout Standard
7542 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7547 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7552 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7553 to indicate that it is a resumed
7554 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7555 , but in the output.
7558 \begin_layout Standard
7559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7567 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7577 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7579 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7580 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7581 of a normal enumeration.
7582 There, insert the command
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7591 \begin_layout Standard
7596 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7600 \begin_layout Enumerate
7604 \begin_layout Enumerate
7608 \begin_layout Standard
7609 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7612 \begin_layout Enumerate
7613 \begin_inset Argument 1
7616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7632 This enumeration starts at 4
7635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7637 \begin_inset Index idx
7640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7649 \begin_layout Standard
7650 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7652 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7655 \begin_layout Itemize
7659 \begin_layout Itemize
7660 with standard spacing
7663 \begin_layout Standard
7664 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7666 Add there the command
7670 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7673 \begin_layout Itemize
7674 \begin_inset Argument 1
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Itemize
7700 \begin_layout Itemize
7704 \begin_layout Standard
7705 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7712 \begin_inset Index idx
7715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7723 For more information see its documentation,
7724 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7735 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7737 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7738 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7742 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7745 \begin_layout Enumerate
7746 \begin_inset Argument 1
7749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7757 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7770 \begin_layout Enumerate
7771 with negative indentation
7774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7775 Further Customization
7776 \begin_inset Index idx
7779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7780 Lists ! Customization
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 You can also change the style of description lists.
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 changes the description label font, the command
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7809 \begin_layout Standard
7810 sets the list style.
7813 \begin_layout Standard
7814 An example where the command
7817 \begin_layout Standard
7822 itshape, style=nextline
7825 \begin_layout Standard
7829 \begin_layout Description
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7835 \begin_inset Argument 1
7838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7844 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7846 itshape, style=nextline
7856 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7857 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7861 \begin_layout Description
7863 \begin_inset space ~
7866 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7867 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7868 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7871 \begin_layout Standard
7872 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7878 \begin_inset Index idx
7881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 For more information see its documentation
7890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7900 \begin_layout Subsection
7902 \begin_inset Index idx
7905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7916 \begin_inset space ~
7919 Address: An Overview
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7924 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7932 \begin_inset space ~
7938 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7939 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7940 gags on the document.
7941 In contrast, you can use the
7948 \begin_inset space ~
7953 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7954 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7958 \begin_layout Standard
7959 Of course, you're not limited to using
7966 \begin_inset space ~
7975 \begin_inset space ~
7980 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7981 some European academic papers.
7984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7988 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7995 \begin_layout Standard
8000 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8001 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8005 \begin_inset space ~
8010 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8011 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8012 Here's an example of each:
8015 \begin_layout Right Address
8017 \begin_inset Newline newline
8021 \begin_inset Newline newline
8025 \begin_inset Newline newline
8028 When is it? What is today?
8031 \begin_layout Standard
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8041 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8043 the largest block of text on a single line.
8044 Here's an example of the
8051 \begin_layout Address
8053 \begin_inset Newline newline
8056 Where do I send this
8057 \begin_inset Newline newline
8060 Your post office and country
8063 \begin_layout Standard
8064 As you can see, both
8071 \begin_inset space ~
8076 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8081 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8082 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8088 This makes sense, since
8096 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8097 Thus, you have to use
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8109 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8110 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8112 \begin_inset space ~
8116 \begin_inset space ~
8121 ) to start a new line in an
8128 \begin_inset space ~
8136 \begin_layout Subsection
8140 \begin_layout Standard
8141 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8142 or list of references.
8144 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8149 \begin_inset Index idx
8152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8161 \begin_layout Standard
8166 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8167 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8168 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8169 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8173 in anything else or vice versa.
8179 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8180 The book document classes ignores the
8184 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8188 in a letter document class.
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8196 environment does several things for you.
8197 First, it puts the centered label
8198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8206 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8208 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8209 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8210 the subsequent text.
8211 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8213 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8222 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8223 The new paragraph will still be in the
8228 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8229 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8232 \begin_layout Standard
8233 \begin_inset Float figure
8240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8242 \begin_inset Graphics
8243 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8251 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8256 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8277 \begin_layout Standard
8278 We would love to demonstrate the
8282 environment, but since this document is in the
8283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8290 class, we can't do this.
8291 We inserted it therefore as figure
8292 \begin_inset space ~
8296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8298 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8303 If you have never heard of an
8304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8311 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8316 \begin_inset Index idx
8319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8328 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8335 \begin_layout Standard
8340 environment is used to list references.
8341 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8342 only use it at the end of the document.
8354 \begin_layout Standard
8355 When you first open a
8359 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8360 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8376 depending on the document class.
8377 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8378 Each paragraph of the
8382 environment is a bibliography entry.
8387 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8388 Each new paragraph is still in the
8395 \begin_layout Standard
8396 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8397 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8399 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8401 handling, have a look at section
8402 \begin_inset space ~
8406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8408 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8415 \begin_layout Subsection
8416 Special Environments
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8421 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8422 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8430 \begin_inset Index idx
8433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8443 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8456 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8458 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8463 key as a fixed whitespace.
8467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8480 \begin_inset space ~
8485 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8503 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8506 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8509 arg "newline-insert newline"
8526 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8527 So, when you finish using the
8532 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8533 Also, you can nest the
8538 environment inside of others.
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 arg "newline-insert newline"
8552 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8557 \begin_inset space \space{}
8567 arg "newline-insert newline"
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 arg "newline-insert newline"
8587 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8595 You must put at least one
8599 in any line you want blank.
8600 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8609 since that will insert
8614 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8617 arg "self-insert \""
8623 \begin_layout Standard
8627 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8631 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8635 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8639 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8643 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8644 printf("Hello World!
8649 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8653 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8657 \begin_layout Standard
8658 This is just the standard
8659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8669 \begin_layout Standard
8675 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8677 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8678 as if you used a typewriter.
8679 \begin_inset Index idx
8682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8683 Paragraph environments|)
8688 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8691 Program Code Listings
8696 \begin_inset space ~
8704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8708 \begin_inset Index idx
8711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8725 environment is similar to the
8730 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8731 computer console text.
8736 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8750 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8751 you can have empty lines.
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 have a certain language and a text style
8768 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8770 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8771 and \SpecialChar TeX
8775 \begin_layout Standard
8776 Because of these properties
8780 works like a typewriter.
8784 \begin_layout Verbatim
8788 \begin_layout Verbatim
8791 The following 2 lines are empty:
8794 \begin_layout Verbatim
8798 \begin_layout Verbatim
8802 \begin_layout Verbatim
8803 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8808 \begin_layout Standard
8813 environment is identical to
8817 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8818 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8825 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8829 \begin_layout Section
8830 Nesting Environments
8831 \begin_inset Index idx
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8835 Nesting ! Environments
8841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8850 \begin_layout Subsection
8854 \begin_layout Standard
8856 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8858 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8860 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8862 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8874 \begin_layout Enumerate
8878 \begin_layout Enumerate
8883 \begin_layout Enumerate
8887 \begin_layout Enumerate
8892 \begin_layout Enumerate
8896 \begin_layout Standard
8897 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8898 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8900 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8902 \begin_inset space ~
8906 \begin_inset space ~
8914 \begin_inset space ~
8918 \begin_inset space ~
8923 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8925 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8928 arg "depth-increment"
8934 arg "depth-decrement"
8948 arg "depth-increment"
8954 arg "depth-decrement"
8958 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8959 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8963 \begin_layout Standard
8964 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8965 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8966 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8967 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8968 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8971 \begin_layout Standard
8972 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8974 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8976 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8979 \begin_layout Subsection
8980 What You Can and Can't Nest
8983 \begin_layout Standard
8984 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8985 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8988 \begin_layout Standard
8989 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8990 than a simple yes or no.
8991 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8994 \begin_layout Itemize
8995 Completely unnestable
8998 \begin_layout Itemize
8999 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9003 \begin_layout Itemize
9004 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9008 \begin_layout Standard
9009 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9010 environments have them:
9013 \begin_layout Description
9014 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9015 Can't nest into them.
9019 \begin_layout Itemize
9025 \begin_layout Itemize
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9037 \begin_layout Itemize
9043 \begin_layout Itemize
9050 \begin_layout Description
9052 \begin_inset space ~
9055 Nestable You can nest them.
9056 You can nest other things into them.
9060 \begin_layout Itemize
9066 \begin_layout Itemize
9072 \begin_layout Itemize
9078 \begin_layout Itemize
9084 \begin_layout Itemize
9090 \begin_layout Itemize
9096 \begin_layout Itemize
9102 \begin_layout Itemize
9109 \begin_layout Itemize
9115 \begin_layout Itemize
9122 \begin_layout Description
9123 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9124 You can't nest anything into them.
9128 \begin_layout Itemize
9134 \begin_layout Itemize
9140 \begin_layout Itemize
9146 \begin_layout Itemize
9152 \begin_layout Itemize
9158 \begin_layout Itemize
9164 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 \begin_layout Itemize
9176 \begin_layout Itemize
9182 \begin_layout Itemize
9188 \begin_layout Itemize
9194 \begin_layout Itemize
9200 \begin_layout Itemize
9206 \begin_layout Itemize
9210 \begin_inset space ~
9216 \begin_layout Itemize
9223 \begin_layout Standard
9224 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9232 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9242 \begin_inset space ~
9245 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9246 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9247 nested section headings violate this.
9255 \begin_layout Subsection
9256 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9257 \begin_inset Index idx
9260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9269 \begin_layout Standard
9270 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9271 affected by nesting anyhow.
9275 \begin_layout Itemize
9279 \begin_layout Itemize
9283 \begin_layout Itemize
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9289 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9297 Figures and tables in
9301 are not affected by this.
9306 Have a look at section
9307 \begin_inset space ~
9311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9313 reference "sec:Floats"
9317 for more information about
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9326 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9327 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9332 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9340 of its own, it behaves just like a
9341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9348 paragraph environment.
9349 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9353 \begin_layout Standard
9354 Here's an example with a table:
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 This is (a) and it's nested.
9367 \begin_layout Standard
9368 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9376 \begin_inset Tabular
9377 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9378 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9379 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9380 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9465 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9472 \begin_layout Enumerate
9474 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9478 \begin_layout Enumerate
9482 \begin_layout Standard
9483 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9486 \begin_layout Enumerate
9491 \begin_layout Enumerate
9492 This is (a) and it's nested.
9496 \begin_layout Standard
9497 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9503 \begin_layout Standard
9505 \begin_inset Tabular
9506 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9507 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9508 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9509 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9593 \begin_layout Standard
9594 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9600 \begin_layout Enumerate
9607 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9610 \begin_layout Enumerate
9614 \begin_layout Standard
9615 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9619 \begin_layout Standard
9620 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9623 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9626 \begin_layout Enumerate
9631 \begin_layout Enumerate
9632 This is (a) and it's nested.
9635 \begin_layout Standard
9636 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9642 \begin_layout Standard
9644 \begin_inset Tabular
9645 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9646 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9647 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9734 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9740 \begin_layout Enumerate
9742 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9753 \begin_layout Standard
9754 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9760 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9761 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9765 \begin_layout Subsection
9766 Usage and General Features
9769 \begin_layout Standard
9770 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9771 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9780 is the innermost possible depth.
9781 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9784 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 level #1 – outermost
9789 \begin_layout Enumerate
9794 \begin_layout Enumerate
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9804 \begin_layout Itemize
9809 \begin_layout Itemize
9818 \begin_layout Standard
9819 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9820 both of them in the example.
9821 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9831 For example, if we tried to nest another
9836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9843 , we would get errors.
9846 \begin_layout Subsection
9848 \begin_inset Index idx
9851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9860 \begin_layout Standard
9861 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9862 We have several examples of nested environments.
9863 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9868 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9871 \begin_layout Labeling
9872 \labelwidthstring MMM
9873 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9882 \begin_layout Labeling
9883 \labelwidthstring MMM
9884 #2-a This is level #2.
9885 We created it by using
9888 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9894 arg "depth-increment"
9901 \begin_layout Labeling
9902 \labelwidthstring MMM
9903 #3-a This is level #3.
9904 This time, we just enter
9911 arg "depth-increment"
9915 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9919 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9925 arg "depth-increment"
9932 \begin_layout Standard
9937 environment, nested inside of
9938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9946 So, it's at level #4.
9947 We did this by entering
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 arg "depth-increment"
9959 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9964 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9980 \begin_layout Standard
9985 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9988 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9994 \begin_layout Labeling
9995 \labelwidthstring MMM
9996 #4-a This is level #4.
10000 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10003 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10008 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10012 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10017 keep nesting things inside
10018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10029 \begin_layout Labeling
10030 \labelwidthstring MMM
10031 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10036 \begin_layout Labeling
10037 \labelwidthstring MMM
10038 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10039 and this is level #6.
10040 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10044 \begin_layout Labeling
10045 \labelwidthstring MMM
10046 #5-b Back to level #5.
10050 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10056 arg "depth-decrement"
10063 \begin_layout Labeling
10064 \labelwidthstring MMM
10068 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10074 arg "depth-decrement"
10077 , we're back at level #4.
10081 \begin_layout Labeling
10082 \labelwidthstring MMM
10083 #3-b Back to level #3.
10084 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10088 \begin_layout Labeling
10089 \labelwidthstring MMM
10090 #2-b Back to level #2.
10094 \begin_layout Labeling
10095 \labelwidthstring MMM
10096 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10097 After this sentence, we will enter
10101 and change the paragraph environment back to
10108 \begin_layout Standard
10109 We could have also used the
10125 environment in place of the
10130 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10134 Example 2: Inheritance
10137 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10138 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10141 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10150 arg "depth-increment"
10154 \begin_inset Newline newline
10157 which, we will change to the
10165 \begin_layout Enumerate
10170 environment, at level #2.
10173 \begin_layout Enumerate
10174 Notice how the nested
10178 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10182 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10186 \begin_layout Standard
10187 We ended this example by entering
10192 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10196 and reset the nesting depth by using
10199 arg "depth-decrement"
10205 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10206 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10215 \begin_inset Argument 1
10218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10219 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10227 \begin_layout Enumerate
10228 This is level #1, in an
10232 paragraph environment.
10233 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10237 \begin_layout Enumerate
10242 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10248 arg "depth-increment"
10252 Now, what happens if we nest an
10256 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10257 label be? An asterisk?
10261 \begin_layout Itemize
10271 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10272 So, its label is a bullet.
10273 (We got here by using
10276 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10282 arg "depth-increment"
10285 , then changing the environment to
10293 \begin_layout Itemize
10294 Here's level #4, produced using
10297 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10303 arg "depth-increment"
10307 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10312 \begin_layout Enumerate
10314 to get to level #5.
10315 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10320 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10324 , because we are in the
10332 environment (that is, it is an
10347 \begin_layout Enumerate
10352 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10353 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10361 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10364 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10367 \begin_layout Enumerate
10371 arg "depth-decrement"
10374 to decrease the depth after the next
10377 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10384 \begin_layout Enumerate
10386 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10391 \begin_layout Enumerate
10393 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10394 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10398 \begin_layout Enumerate
10399 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10408 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10413 reset the counter for the label.
10417 \begin_layout Enumerate
10421 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10427 arg "depth-decrement"
10430 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10431 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10432 into the twofold-nested
10440 \begin_layout Enumerate
10441 The same thing happens if we do another
10444 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10450 arg "depth-decrement"
10453 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10456 \begin_layout Standard
10457 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10462 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10473 The number of other
10477 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10484 The same rule applies for the
10488 environment, as well.
10491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10492 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10497 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10498 the same detail with how we did it.
10507 \begin_layout Standard
10515 arg "depth-increment"
10522 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10523 the example in parentheses someplace.
10524 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10525 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10526 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10530 \begin_layout Enumerate
10535 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10539 \begin_layout Verse
10540 Now we will add verse.
10541 \begin_inset Newline newline
10544 It will get much worse.
10545 \begin_inset Newline newline
10555 arg "depth-increment"
10565 \begin_layout Verse
10566 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10567 \begin_inset Newline newline
10570 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10571 \begin_inset Newline newline
10577 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10585 \begin_layout Verse
10586 Here comes a table:
10590 \begin_layout Standard
10591 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10597 \begin_layout Standard
10599 \begin_inset Tabular
10600 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10601 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10602 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10688 \begin_layout Verse
10692 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10702 arg "depth-increment"
10708 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10714 \begin_inset Newline newline
10722 arg "depth-decrement"
10729 \begin_layout Enumerate
10734 : level #1) This is another item.
10735 Note that selecting a
10739 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10740 3 times to put the table inside the
10747 \begin_layout Quotation
10748 We're now ending the
10752 list and changing to
10757 We're still at level #1.
10758 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10759 The next set of paragraphs is a
10760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10767 We will nest both the
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10779 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10783 for the letter body.
10787 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10790 to preserve the depth.
10791 Remember that you need to use
10794 arg "newline-insert newline"
10797 to create multiple lines inside the
10804 \begin_inset space ~
10814 \begin_layout Right Address
10816 \begin_inset Newline newline
10819 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10820 \begin_inset Newline newline
10826 \begin_layout Address
10828 \begin_inset space ~
10834 \begin_layout Quotation
10835 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10839 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10840 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10841 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10842 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10843 as soon as possible.
10844 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10847 \begin_layout Quotation
10848 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10849 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10850 with your order, along with payment.
10853 \begin_layout Quotation
10854 We thank you again for your patience.
10857 \begin_layout Address
10859 \begin_inset Newline newline
10866 \begin_layout Quotation
10867 That ends that example!
10870 \begin_layout Standard
10871 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10872 gives you a lot of power with just
10874 We could have easily nested an
10895 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10898 \begin_layout Subsection
10900 \begin_inset Index idx
10903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10904 Nesting ! Separation
10910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10912 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10919 \begin_layout Standard
10920 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10922 For example you need two different enumerations:
10925 \begin_layout Enumerate
10930 \begin_layout Enumerate
10935 \begin_layout Enumerate
10939 \begin_layout Standard
10940 \begin_inset Separator plain
10946 \begin_layout Itemize
10952 \begin_layout Standard
10953 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10959 \begin_layout Enumerate
10963 \begin_layout Enumerate
10967 \begin_layout Enumerate
10971 \begin_layout Standard
10972 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10973 list item and use the menu
10975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10976 Separated <Name> Above
10980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10981 Separated <Name> Below
10984 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10985 ) and before or behind it the
10987 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10991 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10992 (red arrow in LyX).
10993 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10994 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10997 \begin_layout Standard
10998 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11001 arg "paragraph-break"
11008 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11011 \begin_layout Section
11012 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
11013 \begin_inset Index idx
11016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11025 \begin_layout Standard
11026 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11027 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11029 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11030 be broken at the end of a line.
11031 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11035 \begin_layout Subsection
11037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11039 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11044 \begin_inset Index idx
11047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11056 \begin_layout Standard
11057 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11058 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11059 ) not to break the line at
11061 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11064 \begin_layout Quote
11065 Further documentation is given in section
11066 \begin_inset Newline newline
11070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11072 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11080 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11095 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11104 A protected space is set with
11106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11107 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11109 \begin_inset space ~
11117 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11123 \begin_layout Subsection
11125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11127 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11132 \begin_inset Index idx
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 Spacing ! Horizontal
11144 \begin_layout Standard
11145 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11148 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11152 The length units are listed in Appendix
11153 \begin_inset space ~
11157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11159 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11170 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11175 \begin_inset Index idx
11178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 Spaces ! Inter-word
11187 \begin_layout Standard
11188 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11189 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11190 at the ends of sentences.
11191 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11192 automatically takes care about this.
11193 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11194 followed by a period; see section
11195 \begin_inset space ~
11199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11201 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11206 To insert a normal space, select
11208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11209 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11211 \begin_inset space ~
11219 arg "space-insert normal"
11225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11229 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11234 \begin_inset Index idx
11237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 \begin_layout Standard
11248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11255 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11264 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11265 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11266 inside abbreviations:
11269 \begin_layout Quote
11271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11278 \begin_layout Standard
11279 or between values and units.
11280 Compare for example this:
11281 \begin_inset Newline newline
11285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11289 \begin_inset Newline newline
11292 10 kg (normal space
11295 \begin_layout Standard
11296 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11299 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11301 \begin_inset space ~
11309 arg "space-insert thin"
11315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 You can also insert the following space types:
11323 \begin_layout Description
11325 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11327 \begin_inset space ~
11333 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11337 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11341 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11345 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11347 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11350 space between the arrows.
11351 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11355 \begin_layout Description
11357 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11359 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11363 \begin_inset space ~
11366 space A line with a
11367 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11371 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11375 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11379 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11381 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11384 space between the arrows.
11387 \begin_layout Description
11389 \begin_inset space ~
11393 \begin_inset space ~
11396 space A line with a
11397 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11401 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11405 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11408 negative thin space between the arrows.
11411 \begin_layout Description
11413 \begin_inset space ~
11417 \begin_inset space ~
11420 space A line with a
11421 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11425 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11429 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11432 negative medium space between the arrows.
11435 \begin_layout Description
11437 \begin_inset space ~
11441 \begin_inset space ~
11444 space A line with a
11445 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11449 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11453 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11456 negative thick space between the arrows.
11459 \begin_layout Description
11461 \begin_inset space ~
11465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11469 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11473 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11477 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11488 em) space between the arrows.
11491 \begin_layout Description
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11501 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11505 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11509 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11520 em) space between the arrows.
11523 \begin_layout Description
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11533 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11537 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11541 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11545 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11552 em) space between the arrows.
11555 \begin_layout Description
11557 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11565 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11570 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11577 cm space between the arrows.
11580 \begin_layout Standard
11582 \begin_inset space ~
11586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11588 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11592 lists the different space sizes.
11595 \begin_layout Standard
11596 \begin_inset Float table
11603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11609 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11613 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 \begin_inset Tabular
11624 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11625 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11626 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11627 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11724 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11741 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11752 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11799 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11958 \begin_inset Index idx
11961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11970 \begin_layout Standard
11971 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11972 feature for adding extra space
11973 in a uniform fashion.
11974 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11975 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11976 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11977 equally between themselves.
11980 \begin_layout Standard
11981 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11984 \begin_layout Quote
11986 This is on the left side
11987 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11990 This is on the right
11993 \begin_layout Quote
11996 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12000 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12006 \begin_layout Quote
12009 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12013 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12017 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12023 \begin_layout Standard
12024 That was an example in the
12030 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12034 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12038 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12041 is one in a standard paragraph.
12042 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12046 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12050 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12053 \begin_inset space ~
12058 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12063 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12067 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12075 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12079 \begin_inset space ~
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12087 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12097 \begin_layout Standard
12099 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12111 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12113 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12117 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12118 (= opened downwards)
12121 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12125 \begin_inset space ~
12131 \begin_layout Standard
12133 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12135 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12139 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12143 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12153 \begin_layout Standard
12154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12162 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12166 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12168 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12169 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12173 option in the space dialog.
12181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12185 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12190 \begin_inset Index idx
12193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12202 \begin_layout Standard
12203 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12204 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12207 \begin_layout Standard
12208 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12211 What is correct English?:
12212 \begin_inset Newline newline
12216 \begin_inset Newline newline
12220 \begin_inset space ~
12223 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12224 \begin_inset Newline newline
12228 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12239 \begin_inset Newline newline
12243 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12254 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12260 \begin_layout Standard
12262 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12279 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12282 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12286 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12292 \begin_inset space ~
12296 \begin_inset space ~
12300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12303 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12312 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12313 That is why it is named
12314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12322 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12323 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12327 \begin_layout Subsection
12329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12331 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12336 \begin_inset Index idx
12339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12348 \begin_layout Standard
12349 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12352 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12354 \begin_inset space ~
12360 There you find the following sizes:
12363 \begin_layout Standard
12376 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12377 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12382 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12384 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12385 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12393 \begin_inset Index idx
12396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12397 Document ! Settings
12402 for the paragraph separation.
12403 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12412 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12416 \begin_layout Standard
12418 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12427 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12428 size including line spacing.
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12439 \begin_inset Index idx
12442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12448 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12449 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12454 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12455 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12464 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12473 s are described in section
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12480 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12489 If there are several
12493 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12494 You can therefore use
12498 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12501 \begin_layout Standard
12506 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12507 \begin_inset space ~
12511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12513 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12520 \begin_layout Standard
12521 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12531 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12532 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12544 \begin_layout Subsection
12545 Paragraph Alignment
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12550 Paragraph ! Alignment
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12559 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12564 dialog (toolbar button
12567 arg "layout-paragraph"
12571 There are five possibilities:
12574 \begin_layout Itemize
12582 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12588 \begin_layout Itemize
12596 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12602 \begin_layout Itemize
12610 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12616 \begin_layout Itemize
12624 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12630 \begin_layout Itemize
12638 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12644 \begin_layout Standard
12645 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12646 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12647 the left and right margins.
12648 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12651 \begin_layout Standard
12653 This paragraph is right aligned,
12656 \begin_layout Standard
12658 this one is centered,
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12663 this one is left aligned.
12666 \begin_layout Subsection
12668 \begin_inset Index idx
12671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 Page breaks ! Forced
12678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12680 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12689 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12690 force a page break where you want one.
12691 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12692 is good at page breaking.
12693 Only if you use a lot of
12697 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12698 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12701 \begin_layout Standard
12702 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12703 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12707 have to change the page breaking.
12710 \begin_layout Standard
12711 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12713 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12715 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12716 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12718 \begin_inset space ~
12724 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12727 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12729 \begin_inset space ~
12734 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12736 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12737 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12741 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12742 at the top of a page.
12743 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12745 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12746 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12747 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12751 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12755 to learn more about
12762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12766 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12771 \begin_inset Index idx
12774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12775 Page breaks ! Clear
12783 \begin_layout Standard
12784 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12785 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12786 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12787 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12788 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12791 \begin_layout Standard
12792 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12795 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12797 \begin_inset space ~
12803 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12806 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12808 \begin_inset space ~
12812 \begin_inset space ~
12817 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12818 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12821 \begin_layout Subsection
12823 \begin_inset Index idx
12826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12835 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12842 \begin_layout Standard
12843 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12845 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12848 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12850 \begin_inset space ~
12854 \begin_inset space ~
12862 arg "newline-insert newline"
12866 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12869 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12871 \begin_inset space ~
12875 \begin_inset space ~
12883 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12886 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12888 This is useful to avoid
12889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12896 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12899 \begin_layout Standard
12900 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12901 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12903 very good at line breaking.
12904 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12905 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12912 reference "sec:Quote"
12917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12919 reference "sec:Verse"
12924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12926 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12933 \begin_layout Subsection
12935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12937 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12942 \begin_inset Index idx
12945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12954 \begin_layout Standard
12956 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12967 \begin_layout Standard
12971 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12972 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12979 you can insert horizontal lines.
12980 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12981 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12982 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12987 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12998 \begin_layout Section
12999 Characters and Symbols
13002 \begin_layout Standard
13003 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13004 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13005 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13013 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13017 for information on how this is done.
13020 \begin_layout Standard
13021 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13026 dialog via the menu
13028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13029 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13035 \begin_layout Standard
13036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13045 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13047 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13055 \begin_layout Section
13056 Fonts and Text Styles
13057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13059 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13066 \begin_layout Subsection
13068 \begin_inset Index idx
13071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13080 \begin_layout Standard
13081 There are two types of fonts:
13084 \begin_layout Description
13086 \begin_inset space ~
13090 \begin_inset Index idx
13093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13099 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13104 characters) in the font.
13105 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13106 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13107 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13108 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13109 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13110 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13111 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13112 \begin_inset Newline newline
13115 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13116 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13117 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13118 sizes than at small ones.
13119 \begin_inset Newline newline
13133 \begin_inset space ~
13141 \begin_layout Description
13143 \begin_inset space ~
13147 \begin_inset Index idx
13150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13156 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13157 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13158 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13159 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13160 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13161 image manipulation program.
13162 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13163 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13167 pixels high up to 34
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13171 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13172 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13173 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13175 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13176 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13177 \begin_inset Newline newline
13180 Bitmap fonts are named
13183 \begin_inset space ~
13188 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13191 \begin_layout Standard
13192 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13193 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13194 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13195 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13196 use scalable fonts.
13199 \begin_layout Standard
13200 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13203 \begin_layout Standard
13204 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13206 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13208 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13211 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13212 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13213 font to emphasize text, you use an
13214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13222 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13224 In \SpecialChar LyX
13225 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13229 \begin_layout Subsection
13232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13234 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13241 \begin_layout Standard
13242 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13243 used its own fonts.
13244 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13245 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13248 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13249 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13250 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13251 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13252 to a word processor.
13253 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13254 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13255 files are very portable across
13256 different machines.
13257 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13258 has increased a lot
13259 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13262 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13270 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13275 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13276 code in the document
13277 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13280 \begin_layout Standard
13281 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13282 engines that are also able directly
13283 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13285 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13287 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13289 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13290 that is installed on your system.
13291 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13294 \begin_layout Standard
13295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13303 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13304 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13312 \begin_layout Subsection
13313 Document Font and Font size
13314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13316 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13321 \begin_inset Index idx
13324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13331 \begin_inset Index idx
13334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13343 \begin_layout Standard
13344 You can set the document fonts in the
13346 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13350 \begin_inset Index idx
13353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13354 Document ! Settings
13364 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13365 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13368 \begin_inset space ~
13377 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13379 \begin_inset space ~
13382 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13385 \begin_layout Standard
13390 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13391 This requires that you use
13403 as the output format, i.
13404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13408 \begin_inset space \space{}
13411 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13412 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13413 installed (see section
13414 \begin_inset space ~
13418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13420 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13425 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13427 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13428 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13430 \begin_inset space ~
13433 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13434 cannot determine the family.
13435 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13436 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13439 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13442 \begin_layout Standard
13443 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13444 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13449 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13455 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13457 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13459 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13462 font encoding, this is
13463 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13464 , depending on the document language,
13467 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13468 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13492 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13493 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13501 \begin_inset space ~
13507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13515 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13536 European Computer Modern
13539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13547 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13550 \begin_layout Standard
13555 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13556 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13564 \begin_inset space ~
13569 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13575 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13576 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13579 \begin_layout Itemize
13583 \begin_inset space ~
13588 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13606 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13607 community in order to replace
13611 as the default font.
13612 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13613 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13630 One difference is improved kerning.
13638 \begin_layout Itemize
13639 If you do not like the look of
13647 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset space ~
13668 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13669 \begin_inset space ~
13672 serif and typewriter fonts,
13676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13677 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13693 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13698 \begin_inset space \space{}
13706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13710 \begin_inset space \space{}
13716 \begin_inset space ~
13724 \begin_inset space ~
13734 but you can also select your own.
13735 \begin_inset Newline newline
13738 The differences between roman,
13741 \begin_inset space ~
13750 fonts are explained in section
13751 \begin_inset space ~
13755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13757 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13762 \begin_inset Newline newline
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13773 was originally designed for newspapers.
13774 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13775 into the small newspaper columns.
13779 \begin_inset space ~
13784 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13787 \begin_layout Standard
13788 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13801 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13806 depends on the class you are using.
13807 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 Note that the font size is the
13816 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13817 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13818 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13819 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13822 \begin_inset space ~
13828 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13829 \begin_inset space ~
13833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13835 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13851 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13853 \begin_inset space ~
13856 serif or typewriter.
13861 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13871 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13874 \begin_layout Standard
13879 LaTeX font encoding
13881 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13882 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13888 \begin_inset Index idx
13891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13899 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13901 \begin_inset space ~
13905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13907 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13914 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13915 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13916 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13920 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13928 \begin_layout Standard
13929 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13931 Use Old Style Figures
13935 Use True Small Caps
13938 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13941 Use Old Style Figures
13943 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13945 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13953 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13957 Use True Small Caps
13959 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13960 of scaled capitals.
13961 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13962 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13963 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13967 \begin_layout Standard
13969 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13970 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13971 provided by the font package (or the
13975 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13980 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13986 \begin_layout Standard
13991 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13992 a font to display the script characters.
13996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13997 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14003 \begin_inset Index idx
14006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14013 So this has no effect for the document language
14029 \begin_layout Standard
14032 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14034 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14035 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14041 \begin_inset Index idx
14044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14046 packages ! microtype
14055 \begin_layout Standard
14058 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14060 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14065 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14066 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14072 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14073 \begin_inset space ~
14077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14079 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14089 \begin_layout Standard
14090 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14094 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14102 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14107 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14108 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14110 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14112 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14115 dialog, see section
14116 \begin_inset space ~
14120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14122 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14134 \begin_layout Subsection
14138 \begin_layout Standard
14139 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14140 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14142 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14143 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14144 choose a math font in the dialog
14146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14150 \begin_inset Index idx
14153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14154 Document ! Settings
14160 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14161 automatically selects a math font.
14162 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14163 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14172 \begin_inset space ~
14178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14183 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14184 document font is available.
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14188 Note that the math font will not be used for
14192 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14198 or by the insertion of the command
14205 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14206 \begin_inset space ~
14210 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14211 while the math characters do not.
14213 \begin_inset space ~
14216 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14219 \begin_inset space ~
14227 \begin_inset space ~
14232 in the document font settings.
14235 \begin_layout Standard
14236 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14237 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14238 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14239 font (in most cases
14240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14246 \begin_inset space ~
14252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14255 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14256 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14264 \begin_inset space ~
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14276 \begin_layout Subsection
14278 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14280 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14288 name "subsec:charstyles"
14295 \begin_inset Index idx
14298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14305 \begin_inset Index idx
14308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14317 \begin_layout Standard
14318 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14319 automatically changes the
14320 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14323 style for certain paragraph environments.
14325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14326 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14328 This is where we meet the concept of
14334 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14336 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14340 \begin_layout Standard
14342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14347 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14371 e., available with all document classes.
14372 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14376 for specific purposes.
14377 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14380 \begin_layout Standard
14382 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14383 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14393 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14397 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14410 — you customized the
14415 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14416 among them, encourage the use of
14428 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14429 \begin_inset space ~
14433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14435 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14440 Rather than fiddling with
14444 , they encourage the use of
14448 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14453 \begin_inset Quotes els
14457 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14460 ), not their form (
14461 \begin_inset Quotes els
14465 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14469 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14470 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14471 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14472 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14473 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14474 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14480 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14484 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14485 With a semantic markup (such as
14489 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14494 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14496 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14497 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14500 \begin_layout Standard
14502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14503 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14504 by \SpecialChar LyX
14510 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14513 Builtin Text Styles
14514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14516 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14523 \begin_layout Standard
14525 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14526 The two builtin text styles can be
14527 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14531 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14535 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14536 both of these styles
14539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14547 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14553 \begin_layout Standard
14558 style, do one of the following:
14561 \begin_layout Itemize
14562 click on the toolbar button
14571 \begin_layout Itemize
14572 use the key binding
14579 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14583 \begin_layout Itemize
14585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14593 arg "dialog-show character"
14599 arg "dialog-show character"
14602 ) as described in section
14603 \begin_inset space ~
14607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14609 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14618 \begin_layout Standard
14619 These commands are all toggles.
14624 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14627 \begin_layout Standard
14628 One typically uses the
14632 style for proper names.
14634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14651 \begin_layout Standard
14653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14658 is producing text in
14662 , but the definition can be changed.
14667 \begin_layout Standard
14669 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14679 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14686 \begin_layout Itemize
14687 clicking on the toolbar button
14696 \begin_layout Itemize
14697 using the keybindings
14704 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14708 \begin_layout Itemize
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14718 arg "dialog-show character"
14724 arg "dialog-show character"
14727 ) as described in section
14728 \begin_inset space ~
14732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14734 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14743 \begin_layout Standard
14748 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14752 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14755 packages use a different font
14756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14757 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14763 \begin_layout Standard
14764 We've been using the
14768 style all over the place in this document.
14769 Here's one more example:
14772 \begin_layout Quotation
14776 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14784 \begin_layout Standard
14785 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14786 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14787 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14788 the common tendency to overuse
14789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14791 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14796 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14805 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14806 only as font changes and integrated in the
14814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14817 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14824 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14826 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14833 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14835 \begin_inset space ~
14838 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14840 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14846 arg "dialog-show character"
14852 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14854 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14860 arg "dialog-show character"
14864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14874 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14881 \begin_layout Standard
14883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14884 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14892 reference "subsec:Modules"
14899 ), or local layout settings (see section
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14906 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14911 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14915 markup for specific functions.
14916 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14921 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14931 \begin_inset Quotes els
14935 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14941 \begin_layout Standard
14943 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14944 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14952 \begin_layout Standard
14954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14955 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14960 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14961 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14962 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14967 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14968 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14973 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14981 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14982 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14983 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14984 \begin_inset Flex Code
14987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14989 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14998 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15003 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15012 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15017 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15026 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15027 on screen their formal appearance.
15032 \begin_layout Subsection
15034 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15036 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15046 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15054 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15062 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15067 \begin_inset Index idx
15070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15079 \begin_layout Standard
15080 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15084 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15093 the properties of text passages
15094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15098 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15099 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15100 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15101 from ordinary dialog.
15102 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15106 \begin_layout Standard
15108 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15109 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15110 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15111 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15112 the properties of the respective text passages.
15117 comes in as a last resort.
15122 \begin_layout Standard
15123 Before we document how to
15124 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15125 use custom character style
15126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15127 tweak the text properties
15129 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15130 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15136 \begin_inset Newline newline
15139 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15140 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15143 \begin_layout Standard
15145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15146 use custom character styles
15147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15148 tweak text properties
15151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15154 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15159 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15161 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15167 arg "dialog-show character"
15172 dialog or press the toolbar button
15175 arg "dialog-show character"
15180 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15183 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15184 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15189 property that you can choose.
15190 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15193 \begin_inset space ~
15198 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15200 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15204 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15206 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15211 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15212 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15213 environments all at once.
15216 \begin_layout Standard
15218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15223 properties, and their options (in addition to
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15232 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15244 \begin_layout Labeling
15245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15259 The possible options are:
15263 \begin_layout Labeling
15264 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15269 This is the Roman font family.
15270 Normally a serif font.
15271 It's also the default family.
15281 \begin_layout Labeling
15282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15286 \begin_inset space ~
15293 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15305 \begin_layout Labeling
15306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15313 This is the Typewriter font family.
15319 arg "font-typewriter"
15325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15329 \begin_layout Standard
15331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15332 The general differences of these families are:
15335 \begin_layout Itemize
15337 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15342 fonts use characters with serifs.
15343 These are the small
15344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15351 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15352 The following example shows the difference:
15353 \begin_inset Newline newline
15357 \begin_inset Newline newline
15362 text without serifs
15365 \begin_inset Newline newline
15368 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15369 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15376 \begin_layout Itemize
15378 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15383 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15384 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15385 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15388 \begin_layout Itemize
15390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15403 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15421 \begin_inset Newline newline
15425 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15443 \begin_inset Note Note
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15448 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15449 For more on phantoms see section
15450 \begin_inset space ~
15454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15456 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15466 \begin_inset Newline newline
15475 \begin_layout Labeling
15476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15481 This corresponds to the print weight.
15486 \begin_layout Labeling
15487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15492 This is the Medium font series.
15493 It's also the default series.
15496 \begin_layout Labeling
15497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15504 This is the Bold font series.
15517 \begin_layout Labeling
15518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15523 As the name implies.
15528 \begin_layout Labeling
15529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15534 This is the Upright font shape.
15535 It's also the default shape.
15538 \begin_layout Labeling
15539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15549 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15559 s the Italic font shape
15565 \begin_layout Labeling
15566 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15573 This is the Slanted font shape
15575 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15576 , this is different from italic).
15579 \begin_layout Labeling
15580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15584 \begin_inset space ~
15591 This is the Small caps font shape
15598 \begin_layout Labeling
15599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15604 Alters the text color.
15605 Note that not all DVI
15606 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15608 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15611 viewers are able to display colors.
15613 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15619 \begin_inset space ~
15626 , which means that the document default color set in
15628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15629 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15635 \begin_inset space ~
15641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15647 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15727 \begin_inset Index idx
15730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15737 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15743 \begin_layout Labeling
15744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15749 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15750 the language of the document.
15751 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15752 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15753 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15756 in blue to indicate the change
15757 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15758 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15762 \begin_inset Newline newline
15765 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15767 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15768 When using the spell checking (see section
15769 \begin_inset space ~
15773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15775 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15779 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15780 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15782 \begin_inset Newline newline
15785 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15787 Exclude from Spellchecking
15790 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15793 \begin_layout Labeling
15794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15799 Alters the size of the font.
15801 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15807 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15810 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15811 document font size.
15812 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15813 the details, but a general description of what
15819 \begin_layout Labeling
15820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15841 arg "font-size tiny"
15847 \begin_layout Labeling
15848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15869 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15875 \begin_layout Labeling
15876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15897 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15903 \begin_layout Labeling
15904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15925 arg "font-size small"
15931 \begin_layout Labeling
15932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15946 It's also the default size.
15950 arg "font-size normal"
15956 \begin_layout Labeling
15957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15978 arg "font-size large"
15984 \begin_layout Labeling
15985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16006 arg "font-size larger"
16012 \begin_layout Labeling
16013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 arg "font-size largest"
16040 \begin_layout Labeling
16041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16062 arg "font-size huge"
16068 \begin_layout Labeling
16069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16090 arg "font-size giant"
16096 \begin_layout Labeling
16097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16102 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16122 arg "font-size increase"
16128 \begin_layout Labeling
16129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16134 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16154 arg "font-size decrease"
16161 \begin_layout Standard
16166 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16167 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16169 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16170 — use those instead.
16171 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16174 \begin_layout Labeling
16175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16177 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16187 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16188 change a few other things at the character level
16189 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16190 have text passages being underlined
16194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16195 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16196 days, when you could not change fonts.
16197 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16198 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16199 because some people
16203 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16210 \begin_layout Labeling
16211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16213 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16220 This is text with emphasize on
16223 This might seem like the same as
16227 , but it is actually a bit different.
16233 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16235 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16240 \begin_layout Labeling
16241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16243 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16248 Don't use underlining.
16253 \begin_layout Labeling
16254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16256 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16270 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16279 arg "font-underline"
16285 \begin_inset Newline newline
16289 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16292 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16293 when you could not change fonts.
16294 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16295 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16296 because some people
16300 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16305 \begin_layout Labeling
16306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16310 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16312 \begin_inset space ~
16321 This is text with Double under
16322 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16333 arg "font-underunderline"
16337 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16339 \begin_inset Newline newline
16342 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16343 about double underbar
16348 \begin_layout Labeling
16349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16353 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16355 \begin_inset space ~
16364 This is text with Wavy under
16365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16376 arg "font-underwave"
16380 \begin_inset Newline newline
16383 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16384 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16390 \begin_layout Labeling
16391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16393 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16398 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16404 \begin_layout Labeling
16405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16407 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16412 Don't use strikethrough.
16415 \begin_layout Labeling
16416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16420 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16422 \begin_inset space ~
16426 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16434 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16436 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16437 Single strikethrough
16445 arg "font-strikeout"
16449 \begin_inset Newline newline
16452 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16453 changed in the meantime.
16456 \begin_layout Labeling
16457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16459 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16463 \begin_inset space ~
16467 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16469 \begin_inset space ~
16473 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16481 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16483 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16489 \begin_inset Newline newline
16492 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16498 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16499 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16500 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16501 \begin_inset space ~
16505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16507 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16514 \begin_layout Itemize
16516 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16523 This is text with emphasize on
16528 \begin_layout Itemize
16532 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16539 This is text with Noun on.
16541 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16548 , this is a logical attribute.
16549 Normally it's equivalent to
16552 \begin_inset space ~
16562 \begin_layout Standard
16563 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16564 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16571 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16572 chosen a new character style
16573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16574 applied a text property
16577 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16580 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16582 \begin_inset space ~
16585 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16587 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16593 arg "dialog-show character"
16601 arg "dialog-show character"
16604 ) dialog, the settings are
16605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16609 You can activate the
16610 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16612 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16613 last applied properties
16615 by using the toolbar button
16618 arg "textstyle-apply"
16622 The button lets you apply
16623 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16624 your custom character style
16625 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16628 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16630 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16631 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16632 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16633 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16638 \begin_layout Standard
16639 To completely reset the
16640 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16642 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16643 text properties of a selection
16645 to the default, use
16646 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16648 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16658 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16663 from the menu of the toolbar button
16666 arg "textstyle-apply"
16673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16674 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16675 you just set the shape to
16676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16708 \begin_layout Standard
16710 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16711 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16719 \begin_inset space ~
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16746 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16764 \begin_inset Newline newline
16768 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16782 \begin_inset Note Note
16785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16786 For more on phantoms see section
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16793 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16803 \begin_inset Newline newline
16809 \begin_layout Itemize
16811 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16816 fonts use characters with serifs.
16817 These are the small
16818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16825 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16826 The following example shows the difference:
16827 \begin_inset Newline newline
16831 \begin_inset Newline newline
16836 text without serifs
16839 \begin_inset Newline newline
16842 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16843 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16850 \begin_layout Itemize
16852 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16857 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16858 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16859 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16864 \begin_layout Standard
16866 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16874 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16875 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16878 \begin_inset space ~
16883 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16884 the property to be removed.
16885 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16886 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16887 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16905 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16906 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16914 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16918 \begin_inset space ~
16923 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16934 If you, for example, set
16935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16953 \begin_inset space ~
16958 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16967 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16972 \begin_layout Standard
16974 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16977 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16978 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16981 \begin_layout Section
16982 Printing and Previewing
16985 \begin_layout Subsection
16989 \begin_layout Standard
16990 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16991 using \SpecialChar LyX
16992 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16993 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16994 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16995 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16997 Additional Features
17002 \begin_layout Standard
17004 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17007 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17008 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17009 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17012 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17013 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17014 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17015 to turn your writing into printable output.
17016 This happens in two stages:
17019 \begin_layout Enumerate
17020 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17021 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17023 a file with the extension,
17024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17038 \begin_layout Enumerate
17039 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17040 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17041 to use the commands in the
17045 file to produce printable output.
17048 \begin_layout Subsection
17049 Output file formats
17050 \begin_inset Index idx
17053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17062 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17070 Simple text (ASCII)
17071 \begin_inset Index idx
17074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17075 File formats ! ASCII
17083 \begin_layout Standard
17084 This file type has the extension
17085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17101 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17108 \begin_layout Standard
17109 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
17111 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17112 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17114 \begin_inset space ~
17120 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17121 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17122 bibliography (section
17123 \begin_inset space ~
17127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17129 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17134 If your document includes such material, use
17136 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17137 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17139 \begin_inset space ~
17143 \begin_inset space ~
17147 \begin_inset space ~
17155 \begin_inset space ~
17159 \begin_inset space ~
17165 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17166 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
17169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17172 \begin_inset Index idx
17175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17176 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17185 \begin_layout Standard
17186 This file type has the extension
17187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17198 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17201 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17202 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17203 -Errors or to process it manually
17204 with console commands.
17205 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17206 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17207 's temporary directory whenever you
17208 view or export your document.
17211 \begin_layout Standard
17212 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17213 -file using the menu
17215 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17216 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17220 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17221 export variants are explained in section
17222 \begin_inset space ~
17226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17228 reference "subsec:Export"
17235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17237 \begin_inset Index idx
17240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17249 \begin_layout Standard
17250 This file type has the extension
17251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17271 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17272 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17273 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17277 \begin_layout Standard
17278 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17279 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17280 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17281 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17282 when you view the DVI.
17283 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17286 \begin_layout Standard
17287 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17289 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17290 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17296 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17298 \begin_inset space ~
17304 The latter option uses the program
17306 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17312 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17315 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17316 font access (see section
17317 \begin_inset space ~
17321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17323 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17328 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17329 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17336 \begin_inset Index idx
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17340 File formats ! PostScript
17348 \begin_layout Standard
17349 This file type has the extension
17350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17362 PostScript was developed by the company
17366 as a printer language.
17367 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17369 PostScript can be seen as a
17370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17373 programming language
17374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17377 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17382 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17389 \begin_inset Index idx
17392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17394 packages ! pstricks
17404 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17407 \begin_layout Standard
17408 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17412 Encapsulated PostScript
17413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17416 (EPS, file extension
17417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17429 As \SpecialChar LyX
17430 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17431 convert them in the background to EPS.
17432 If, for example, you have 50
17433 \begin_inset space ~
17436 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17441 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17442 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17444 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17445 EPS to avoid this problem.
17448 \begin_layout Standard
17449 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17451 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17452 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17460 \begin_inset Index idx
17463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17470 \begin_inset Index idx
17473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 This file type has the extension
17484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17500 Portable Document Format
17501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17508 was derived from PostScript.
17509 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17518 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17519 looks exactly the same.
17522 \begin_layout Standard
17523 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17527 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17531 (JPG, file extension
17532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17559 Portable Network Graphics
17560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 (PNG, file extension
17564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17576 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17577 converts them in the
17578 background to one of these formats.
17579 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17580 will slow down your workflow.
17581 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17587 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17593 \begin_layout Description
17595 \begin_inset space ~
17598 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17602 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17605 \begin_layout Description
17607 \begin_inset space ~
17614 ) This uses the program
17616 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17619 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17622 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17625 is a new engine, derived from
17629 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17630 access (see section
17631 \begin_inset space ~
17635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17637 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17642 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17643 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17648 \begin_layout Description
17650 \begin_inset space ~
17657 ) This uses the program
17662 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17668 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17669 font access (see section
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17676 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17681 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17682 vertically written Japanese.
17685 \begin_layout Description
17687 \begin_inset space ~
17690 (cropped) This is the same as
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17698 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17699 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17700 to generate good-looking
17701 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17704 \begin_layout Description
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17709 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17713 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17717 \begin_layout Description
17719 \begin_inset space ~
17722 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17726 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17727 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17731 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17732 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17735 \begin_layout Standard
17739 \begin_inset space ~
17748 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17749 works without problems.
17750 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17751 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17755 \begin_inset space ~
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17768 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17778 \begin_inset Index idx
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17782 FileFormats ! XHTML
17788 \begin_inset Index idx
17791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 This file type has the extension
17802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17814 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17815 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17816 When \SpecialChar LyX
17817 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17818 suitable for the purpose.
17819 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17825 between different formats, which are described in section
17827 Math Output in XHTML
17832 \begin_inset space ~
17840 \begin_layout Standard
17841 XHTML output remains
17842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17849 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17850 features are supported yet.
17854 and the World Wide Web
17858 Additional Features
17860 manual, for more information.
17863 \begin_layout Standard
17864 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17866 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17867 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17873 \begin_layout Subsection
17875 \begin_inset Index idx
17878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17888 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17889 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17898 or use the toolbar button
17905 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17906 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17907 \begin_inset space ~
17911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17913 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17917 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17925 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17930 Further output formats can be selected via
17932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17933 View (Other Formats)
17935 or the toolbar button
17944 \begin_layout Standard
17945 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17946 viewer window using the menu
17948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17954 Update (Other Formats)
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17960 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17963 To have a real output, export your document.
17966 \begin_layout Section
17967 A few Words about Typography
17968 \begin_inset Index idx
17971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17980 \begin_layout Subsection
17981 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17982 \begin_inset Index idx
17985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17992 \begin_inset Index idx
17995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18004 \begin_layout Standard
18005 In \SpecialChar LyX
18007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18018 symbol comes in four variants: the
18035 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18041 \begin_layout Standard
18042 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18052 height_special "totalheight"
18057 backgroundcolor "none"
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 \begin_inset Tabular
18062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18064 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18065 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18066 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18067 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18096 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18159 system key combination
18163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18164 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18176 and the em dash with
18179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18192 is the Mac label for the right
18202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18215 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 system key combination or
18239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18266 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18305 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18311 \begin_layout Standard
18312 Dashes can also be inserted with
18314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18316 \begin_inset space ~
18319 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18327 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18328 and 2014 for the en dash).
18331 \begin_layout Standard
18332 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18333 mode and has a length of its own.
18334 Here are some examples:
18337 \begin_layout Enumerate
18338 line- and page-breaks
18339 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18349 \begin_layout Enumerate
18351 \begin_inset space ~
18355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18365 \begin_layout Enumerate
18366 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18377 \begin_layout Enumerate
18378 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18382 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18392 \begin_layout Standard
18394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18396 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18397 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18405 \begin_layout Subsection
18406 Dashes and Line Breaks
18407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18409 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18416 \begin_layout Standard
18417 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18418 case and locale, e.
18419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18425 \begin_layout Itemize
18426 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18427 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18430 \begin_layout Itemize
18431 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18435 \begin_layout Itemize
18436 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18437 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18440 \begin_layout Standard
18441 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18442 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18453 allows line breaks after hyphens
18454 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18456 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18459 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18462 \begin_layout Enumerate
18463 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18464 \begin_inset space ~
18467 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18469 The Elements of Typographic Style
18472 \begin_inset space ~
18475 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18478 \begin_layout Enumerate
18479 Unwanted line breaks
18484 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18486 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18489 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 Prevent Hyphenation
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18517 in \SpecialChar TeX
18519 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18520 , a protected space does not suffice
18524 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18532 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18533 in the document language.
18534 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18548 \begin_layout Itemize
18550 \begin_inset space ~
18554 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18564 height_special "totalheight"
18569 backgroundcolor "none"
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 \begin_layout Itemize
18583 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18593 height_special "totalheight"
18598 backgroundcolor "none"
18601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18603 \begin_inset space ~
18611 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18612 \begin_inset space ~
18615 – sont très utiles.
18618 \begin_layout Itemize
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18636 \begin_layout Standard
18637 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18638 \begin_inset space ~
18641 – in contrast to an overfull line
18642 \begin_inset space ~
18645 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18649 \begin_layout Standard
18650 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18653 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18654 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18655 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18656 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18661 \begin_layout Enumerate
18662 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18663 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18664 or \SpecialChar TeX
18670 \begin_layout Itemize
18672 \begin_inset space ~
18675 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18676 \begin_inset space ~
18679 – sont très utiles.
18683 \begin_layout Enumerate
18684 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18685 \begin_inset Newline newline
18690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18691 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18693 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18695 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18697 \begin_inset space ~
18703 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18705 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18707 \begin_inset space ~
18718 \begin_layout Itemize
18719 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18720 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18721 should be followed by
18722 a line break opportunity.
18725 \begin_layout Standard
18726 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18733 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18744 \begin_layout Enumerate
18745 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18746 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18747 or en dashes (see section
18748 \begin_inset space ~
18752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18754 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18765 Changes and backwards compatibility
18768 \begin_layout Standard
18769 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18771 \begin_inset space ~
18774 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18775 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18784 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18785 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18793 \begin_layout Standard
18794 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18796 \begin_inset space ~
18799 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18801 prevents ligation to dashes.
18803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18810 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18815 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18816 after the input (unless the current text font is
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 The behavior was changed since
18826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18841 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18842 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18843 as non-breakable dashes.
18844 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18852 \begin_layout Standard
18855 \begin_inset space ~
18863 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18865 \begin_inset space ~
18868 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18873 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18874 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18876 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18880 If you used both literal and
18881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18888 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18890 \begin_inset space ~
18893 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18894 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18897 \begin_layout Subsection
18899 \begin_inset Index idx
18902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18911 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18919 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18920 but automatically in the output.
18921 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18927 \begin_inset Index idx
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18937 following the rules of the document language.
18939 does not hyphenate text in the
18943 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18946 \begin_layout Standard
18948 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18952 font and with unusual constructs, like
18953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18961 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18962 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18963 This is done with the menu
18965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18966 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18968 \begin_inset space ~
18974 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18976 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18980 \begin_layout Standard
18981 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18982 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18993 would then see the hyphen
18994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19001 as a line break possibility.
19002 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19003 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19010 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19012 Prevent Hyphenation
19017 \begin_inset space ~
19025 \begin_layout Subsection
19027 \begin_inset Index idx
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19040 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19043 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19050 \begin_layout Standard
19051 When \SpecialChar LyX
19052 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19053 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19055 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19061 appropriate amount of space.
19062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19065 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19067 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19068 gets after another word.
19071 \begin_layout Standard
19072 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19073 not work in all cases.
19075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19086 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19087 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19090 \begin_layout Standard
19091 Here are some examples of
19095 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19098 \begin_layout Itemize
19103 \begin_layout Itemize
19108 \begin_layout Standard
19109 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19112 \begin_layout Itemize
19114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19118 this is too much space!
19121 \begin_layout Itemize
19126 \begin_layout Standard
19127 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19130 \begin_layout Standard
19131 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19134 \begin_layout Enumerate
19138 \begin_inset space ~
19143 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19144 \begin_inset space ~
19148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19150 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19155 \begin_inset Index idx
19158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 Spaces ! inter-word
19167 \begin_layout Enumerate
19171 \begin_inset space ~
19176 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19177 \begin_inset space ~
19181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19183 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19188 \begin_inset Index idx
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 \begin_layout Enumerate
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19208 \begin_inset space ~
19212 \begin_inset space ~
19219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19221 \begin_inset space ~
19226 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19227 This function is also bound to
19230 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19236 \begin_layout Standard
19237 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19240 \begin_layout Itemize
19242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19246 \begin_inset space \space{}
19249 this is too much space!
19252 \begin_layout Itemize
19253 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19259 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19261 will take care of this.
19264 \begin_layout Standard
19265 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19269 \begin_inset space ~
19275 feature described in the section
19277 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19282 Additional Features
19287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19289 \begin_inset Index idx
19292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19293 Typography ! Quotation marks
19299 \begin_inset Index idx
19302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19303 Quotation marks | see
19307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 \begin_layout Standard
19335 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19336 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19337 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19347 The keyboard character,
19351 , generates this automatically.
19354 \begin_layout Standard
19355 You can specify what character the
19359 key produces by using the submenu
19365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19369 \begin_inset Index idx
19372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19373 Document ! Settings
19378 dialog and switching the
19382 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19383 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19391 \begin_layout Labeling
19392 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19404 \begin_inset space ~
19408 \begin_inset space ~
19412 \begin_inset Quotes els
19416 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19430 \begin_inset Quotes els
19434 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19437 quotation marks (as common, e.
19438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19444 \begin_layout Labeling
19445 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19448 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19452 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19456 \begin_inset space ~
19460 \begin_inset space ~
19464 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19468 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19474 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19478 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19482 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19486 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19489 quotation marks (as common, e.
19490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19496 \begin_layout Labeling
19497 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19500 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19504 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19508 \begin_inset space ~
19512 \begin_inset space ~
19516 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19520 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19526 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19530 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19534 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19538 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19541 quotation marks (as common, e.
19542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19548 \begin_layout Labeling
19549 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19552 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19556 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19560 \begin_inset space ~
19564 \begin_inset space ~
19568 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19572 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19578 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19582 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19586 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19590 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19593 quotation marks (as common, e.
19594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19600 \begin_layout Labeling
19601 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19604 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19608 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19612 \begin_inset space ~
19616 \begin_inset space ~
19620 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19624 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19630 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19634 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19638 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19642 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19645 quotation marks (as common, e.
19646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19649 g., in Switzerland)
19652 \begin_layout Labeling
19653 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19656 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19660 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19664 \begin_inset space ~
19668 \begin_inset space ~
19672 \begin_inset Quotes als
19676 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19682 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19686 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19690 \begin_inset Quotes als
19694 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19697 quotation marks (as common, e.
19698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19704 \begin_layout Labeling
19705 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19708 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19712 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19716 \begin_inset space ~
19720 \begin_inset space ~
19724 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19728 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19734 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19738 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19742 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19746 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19749 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19752 \begin_layout Labeling
19753 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19756 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19760 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19764 \begin_inset space ~
19768 \begin_inset space ~
19772 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19776 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19782 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19786 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19790 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19794 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19797 quotation marks (as common, e.
19798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19801 g., in Great Britain)
19804 \begin_layout Labeling
19805 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19808 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19812 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19816 \begin_inset space ~
19820 \begin_inset space ~
19824 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19828 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19834 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19838 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19842 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19846 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19849 quotation marks (as common, e.
19850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19856 \begin_layout Labeling
19857 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19860 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19864 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19868 \begin_inset space ~
19872 \begin_inset space ~
19876 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19880 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19886 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19890 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19894 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19898 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19901 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19907 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19908 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19909 the inner marks differ).
19917 \begin_layout Labeling
19918 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19921 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19925 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19929 \begin_inset space ~
19933 \begin_inset space ~
19937 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19941 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19947 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19951 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19955 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19959 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19962 quotation marks (as common, e.
19963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19969 \begin_layout Labeling
19970 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19973 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19977 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19981 \begin_inset space ~
19985 \begin_inset space ~
19989 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19993 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19999 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20003 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20007 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20011 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20014 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20017 \begin_layout Labeling
20018 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20019 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20027 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20033 \begin_inset space ~
20037 \begin_inset space ~
20043 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20051 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20055 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20059 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20063 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20067 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20070 quotation marks (as common, e.
20071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20080 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20088 \begin_layout Labeling
20089 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20090 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20098 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20104 \begin_inset space ~
20108 \begin_inset space ~
20114 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20122 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20126 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20130 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20134 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20138 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20141 quotation marks (as common, e.
20142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20145 g., in North Korea and China)
20149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20151 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20159 \begin_layout Standard
20160 Inner quotation marks
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20166 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20167 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20175 does not necessarily mean
20176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20184 This is why we call them
20185 \begin_inset Quotes els
20189 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20205 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20207 \begin_inset Quotes els
20211 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20214 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20217 arg "quote-insert inner"
20222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20228 \begin_layout Standard
20229 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20230 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20231 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20232 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20233 If you check the setting
20235 Use dynamic quotation marks
20239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20243 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20244 they appear in a special color).
20245 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20246 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20251 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20254 \begin_layout Standard
20255 Individual quotation marks (i.
20256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20259 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20260 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20264 \begin_layout Subsection
20266 \begin_inset Index idx
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20270 Typography ! Ligatures
20276 \begin_inset Index idx
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20310 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20317 \begin_layout Standard
20318 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20319 print them as single characters.
20320 These groups are known as
20325 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20326 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20328 Here are the standard ligatures:
20331 \begin_layout Itemize
20335 \begin_layout Itemize
20339 \begin_layout Itemize
20343 \begin_layout Itemize
20347 \begin_layout Itemize
20351 \begin_layout Standard
20352 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20355 \begin_layout Standard
20356 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20357 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20365 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20381 To break a ligature, use
20383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20384 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20386 \begin_inset space ~
20393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20404 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20421 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20429 \begin_layout Subsection
20431 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20433 \begin_inset Index idx
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 \begin_layout Standard
20449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20450 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20454 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20457 \begin_layout Description
20459 The name of the game.
20462 \begin_layout Description
20464 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20468 \begin_layout Description
20470 The \SpecialChar TeX
20471 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20475 \begin_layout Description
20476 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20477 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20481 \begin_layout Standard
20482 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20488 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20496 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20497 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20498 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20499 converges to the number
20500 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20503 : The actual version is
20504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20512 , the previous one was
20513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20524 \begin_layout Subsection
20526 \begin_inset Index idx
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 \begin_layout Standard
20539 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20540 space between two words.
20541 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20551 for units use the menu
20553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20554 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20556 \begin_inset space ~
20564 arg "space-insert thin"
20570 \begin_layout Standard
20571 Here is an example to show the differences:
20574 \begin_layout Standard
20575 \begin_inset Tabular
20576 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20577 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20578 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20579 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 \begin_inset space ~
20590 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 space between number and unit
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20618 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 half space between number and unit
20643 \begin_layout Subsection
20645 \begin_inset Index idx
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20657 \begin_layout Standard
20658 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20660 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20661 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20662 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20663 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20664 These bits of text became known as
20675 \begin_layout Standard
20676 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20677 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20678 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20679 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20680 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20681 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20682 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20683 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20684 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20685 \begin_inset Newline newline
20693 \begin_inset Newline newline
20701 \begin_inset Newline newline
20704 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20705 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20706 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20708 \begin_inset space ~
20712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20714 key "latexcompanion"
20720 \begin_inset space ~
20724 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20731 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20732 's page break mechanism.
20735 \begin_layout Chapter
20736 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20739 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20746 \begin_layout Standard
20747 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20750 \begin_inset space ~
20756 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20759 \begin_layout Section
20761 \begin_inset Index idx
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20780 \begin_layout Standard
20782 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20785 \begin_layout Description
20788 \begin_inset space ~
20791 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20792 \begin_inset Newline newline
20796 \begin_inset Note Note
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20808 \begin_layout Description
20809 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20810 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20811 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20814 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20815 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20817 \begin_inset space ~
20823 \begin_inset Newline newline
20827 \begin_inset Note Comment
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20840 \begin_layout Description
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20845 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20846 set in the document settings under
20848 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20850 \begin_inset space ~
20856 \begin_inset Newline newline
20860 \begin_inset Newline newline
20864 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20874 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20879 of a comment that appears in the output.
20885 \begin_inset Newline newline
20889 \begin_inset Newline newline
20892 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20895 \begin_layout Standard
20896 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20908 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20911 \begin_layout Section
20913 \begin_inset Index idx
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20925 name "sec:Footnotes"
20932 \begin_layout Standard
20934 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20940 or the toolbar button
20943 arg "footnote-insert"
20955 \begin_inset Graphics
20956 filename clipart/footnote.png
20965 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20966 's representation of your footnote.
20976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20995 label, the box will
20999 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21000 Clicking on the box label again will close
21013 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21014 and click on the footnote
21029 \begin_layout Standard
21030 Here is an example footnote:
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21047 \begin_layout Standard
21048 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21049 position where the footnote box is placed.
21050 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21051 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21052 according to the document class.
21054 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21055 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21061 ey are described in the
21064 \begin_inset space ~
21072 \begin_layout Section
21074 \begin_inset Index idx
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21086 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21093 \begin_layout Standard
21094 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21096 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21100 \begin_inset space ~
21105 or the toolbar button
21108 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21134 appearing within your text.
21135 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21136 's representation of your margin
21145 \begin_layout Standard
21146 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21150 \begin_inset Marginal
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 This is a marginal note.
21163 \begin_layout Standard
21164 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21165 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21166 pages, right on odd pages.
21169 \begin_layout Standard
21170 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21173 \begin_inset space ~
21181 \begin_inset space ~
21189 \begin_layout Section
21190 Graphics and Images
21191 \begin_inset Index idx
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 \begin_inset Index idx
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21213 name "sec:Graphics"
21220 \begin_layout Standard
21221 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21222 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21225 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21234 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21237 \begin_layout Standard
21238 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21243 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21244 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21246 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21247 \begin_inset space ~
21251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21253 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21260 \begin_layout Standard
21265 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21266 of the image in the output.
21267 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21271 \begin_inset space ~
21275 \begin_inset space ~
21284 \begin_inset space ~
21288 \begin_inset space ~
21292 \begin_inset space ~
21297 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21298 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21306 \begin_layout Standard
21310 \begin_inset space ~
21314 \begin_inset space ~
21319 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21320 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21322 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21327 \begin_inset space ~
21332 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21333 with the image size is printed.
21336 \begin_layout Standard
21337 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21338 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21340 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21343 \begin_layout Standard
21345 \begin_inset Graphics
21346 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21354 \begin_layout Standard
21355 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21356 the image into a float, see section
21357 \begin_inset space ~
21361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21363 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21370 \begin_layout Subsection
21372 \begin_inset Index idx
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21384 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21391 \begin_layout Standard
21392 You can insert images in any known file format.
21393 But as we explained in section
21394 \begin_inset space ~
21398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21400 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21404 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21406 therefore uses the program
21410 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21411 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21412 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21413 \begin_inset space ~
21417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21419 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21426 \begin_layout Standard
21427 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21430 \begin_layout Description
21432 \begin_inset space ~
21435 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21436 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21437 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21441 Graphics Interchange Format
21442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21445 (GIF, file extension
21446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21458 \begin_inset Index idx
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21493 Portable Network Graphics
21494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21497 (PNG, file extension
21498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21510 \begin_inset Index idx
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21545 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21549 (JPG, file extension
21550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21574 \begin_inset Index idx
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 \begin_layout Description
21610 \begin_inset space ~
21613 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21615 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21616 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21617 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21618 \begin_inset Newline newline
21621 Scalable image formats can be
21622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21625 Scalable Vector Graphics
21626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21629 (SVG, file extension
21630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21642 \begin_inset Index idx
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21677 Encapsulated PostScript
21678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21681 (EPS, file extension
21682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21694 \begin_inset Index idx
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21729 Portable Document Format
21730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21733 (PDF, file extension
21734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21746 \begin_inset Index idx
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21764 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21765 result will not be scalable.
21766 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21780 \begin_layout Standard
21781 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21788 \begin_layout Subsection
21789 Grouping of Image Settings
21790 \begin_inset Index idx
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 Images ! Settings grouping
21802 \begin_layout Standard
21803 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21805 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21806 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21808 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21809 need to manually change each of them.
21813 \begin_layout Standard
21814 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21817 \begin_inset space ~
21821 \begin_inset space ~
21833 \begin_inset space ~
21837 \begin_inset space ~
21843 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21844 and checking the name of the desired group.
21847 \begin_layout Section
21849 \begin_inset Index idx
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21868 \begin_layout Standard
21869 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21872 arg "tabular-insert"
21877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21881 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21882 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21883 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21886 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21887 from the rest of the table.
21888 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21889 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21891 Here is an example table:
21894 \begin_layout Standard
21896 \begin_inset Tabular
21897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21898 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21899 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21900 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21902 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22107 This corresponds to the
22108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22115 table style listed in the style selection.
22118 \begin_layout Standard
22120 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22121 Other available styles include:
22124 \begin_layout Itemize
22126 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22135 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22139 \begin_layout Itemize
22141 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22142 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22145 \begin_layout Itemize
22147 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22156 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22157 bold top/bottom lines (see
22168 \begin_layout Standard
22170 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22171 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22172 button can be changed in
22174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22175 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22179 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22183 \begin_layout Subsection
22187 \begin_layout Standard
22188 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22191 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22195 This brings up the table dialog.
22196 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22197 cursor is placed currently.
22198 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22199 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22200 done on all of your selection.
22203 \begin_layout Standard
22204 In addition to the table dialog, the
22207 \begin_inset space ~
22212 helps you in setting table properties.
22213 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22216 \begin_layout Standard
22220 \begin_inset space ~
22225 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22226 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22227 current cell respectively.
22228 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22230 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22231 of text, see section
22232 \begin_inset space ~
22236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22238 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22245 \begin_layout Standard
22246 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22247 using the check box
22256 This will merge the cells to
22260 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22261 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22262 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22263 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22264 in the last row without the upper border:
22267 \begin_layout Standard
22269 \begin_inset Tabular
22270 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22271 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22273 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 \begin_layout Standard
22407 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22408 -arguments for the table.
22409 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22410 explained in the chapter
22417 \begin_inset space ~
22423 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22424 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22425 but are visible in the output.
22428 \begin_layout Standard
22429 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 Most DVI-viewers are
22441 able to display rotations.
22449 \begin_layout Standard
22454 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22459 adds lines for all cell borders.
22462 \begin_layout Subsection
22464 \begin_inset Index idx
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 Tables ! Multi-page
22474 \begin_inset Index idx
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 \begin_layout Standard
22487 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22490 \begin_inset space ~
22494 \begin_inset space ~
22502 \begin_inset space ~
22507 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22508 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22511 \begin_layout Description
22516 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22517 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22518 Except for the first page, if
22521 \begin_inset space ~
22529 \begin_layout Description
22533 \begin_inset space ~
22538 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22539 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22542 \begin_layout Description
22547 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22548 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22549 except for the last page, if
22552 \begin_inset space ~
22560 \begin_layout Description
22564 \begin_inset space ~
22569 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22570 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22573 \begin_layout Description
22574 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22575 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22581 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22584 \begin_inset space ~
22592 \begin_layout Standard
22593 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22594 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22595 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22601 In this context, first means first in this order:
22604 \begin_inset space ~
22616 \begin_inset space ~
22621 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22624 \begin_layout Standard
22626 \begin_inset Tabular
22627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22628 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22629 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22630 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22631 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22632 <row endfirsthead="true">
22633 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22644 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <row endfirsthead="true">
22664 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <row endhead="true">
22697 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <row endhead="true">
22728 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22760 <row endfoot="true">
22761 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23844 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24247 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24588 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24619 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24650 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24712 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24742 <row endlastfoot="true">
24743 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24754 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24763 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 \begin_layout Subsection
24782 \begin_inset Index idx
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24794 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24801 \begin_layout Standard
24802 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24803 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24804 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24805 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24809 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24813 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24814 for the column in the table dialog.
24815 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24816 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24820 \begin_layout Standard
24822 \begin_inset Tabular
24823 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24824 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24825 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24826 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24827 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24972 This is longer now.
24977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25029 This is longer now.
25034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_layout Standard
25061 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25062 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25068 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25074 Selection with the mouse or with
25078 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25079 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25080 the selection from outside the table.
25083 \begin_layout Section
25085 \begin_inset Index idx
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25104 \begin_layout Subsection
25108 \begin_layout Standard
25109 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25110 have a fixed location.
25112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25119 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25127 \begin_inset space ~
25132 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25133 too many notes on the current page.
25136 \begin_layout Standard
25137 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25138 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25139 and pages without text.
25140 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25141 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25142 Floats are therefore numbered.
25143 Referencing is described in section
25144 \begin_inset space ~
25148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25150 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25157 \begin_layout Standard
25158 To insert a float, use the menu
25160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25164 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25165 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25167 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25168 \begin_inset Index idx
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25177 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25178 paragraph within the float.
25179 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25180 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25181 left-clicking on the box label.
25182 A closed float box looks like this:
25183 \begin_inset Graphics
25184 filename clipart/float.png
25189 – a gray button with a red label.
25192 \begin_layout Standard
25193 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25195 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25198 \begin_layout Subsection
25200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25202 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25207 \begin_inset Index idx
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 Floats ! Figure floats
25219 \begin_layout Standard
25221 \begin_inset space ~
25225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25227 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25231 was created using the menu
25233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25234 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25240 arg "float-insert figure"
25244 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25253 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25257 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25258 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25262 \begin_inset space ~
25270 arg "layout-paragraph"
25276 \begin_layout Standard
25277 \begin_inset Float figure
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_inset Graphics
25287 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25302 name "fig:A-star-in"
25319 \begin_layout Standard
25320 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25321 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25323 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25332 ) and refer to it using the menu
25334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25340 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25344 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25345 vague references like
25346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25353 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25354 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25364 For more about cross-references, see section
25365 \begin_inset space ~
25369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25371 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25378 \begin_layout Standard
25379 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25380 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25381 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25382 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25383 as described in section
25384 \begin_inset space ~
25388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25390 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25396 \begin_inset space ~
25400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25402 reference "fig:Two-images"
25406 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25407 You can also set the images one below the other.
25409 \begin_inset space ~
25413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25415 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25422 reference "fig:Star"
25426 are the subfigures.
25429 \begin_layout Standard
25430 \begin_inset Float figure
25437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25442 \begin_inset Float figure
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25455 name "fig:Undefinable"
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25468 \begin_inset Graphics
25469 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25481 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25485 \begin_inset Float figure
25492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25493 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25511 \begin_inset Graphics
25512 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25524 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25536 name "fig:Two-images"
25553 \begin_layout Subsection
25555 \begin_inset Index idx
25558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25559 Floats ! Table floats
25567 \begin_layout Standard
25568 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25571 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25574 or the toolbar button
25577 arg "float-insert table"
25581 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25582 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25583 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25585 \begin_inset space ~
25589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25591 reference "tab:Table-float"
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25599 \begin_inset Float table
25606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25612 name "tab:Table-float"
25624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 \begin_inset Tabular
25627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25629 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25758 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25782 \end{array}\right]$
25790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25803 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25824 \begin_layout Subsection
25826 \begin_inset Index idx
25829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 \begin_layout Standard
25840 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25841 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25842 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25844 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25852 \begin_inset space ~
25860 \begin_layout Section
25862 \begin_inset Index idx
25865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25874 \begin_layout Standard
25876 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25878 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25879 \begin_inset space \space{}
25886 \begin_layout Standard
25887 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25888 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25890 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25894 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25895 and its alignment within the page.
25898 \begin_layout Standard
25900 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25910 height_special "totalheight"
25915 backgroundcolor "none"
25918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 This is a minipage.
25922 The text is set in an italic style.
25925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25928 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25929 another formatting.
25937 \begin_layout Standard
25938 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25941 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25945 as described in section
25946 \begin_inset space ~
25950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25952 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25957 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25963 \begin_layout Standard
25964 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25974 height_special "totalheight"
25979 backgroundcolor "none"
25982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25984 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25990 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25994 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26004 height_special "totalheight"
26009 backgroundcolor "none"
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26013 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26014 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26029 \begin_layout Standard
26030 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26032 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26039 \begin_inset space ~
26047 \begin_layout Chapter
26048 Mathematical Formulas
26049 \begin_inset Index idx
26052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26059 \begin_inset Index idx
26062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26093 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26100 \begin_layout Standard
26101 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26106 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26109 \begin_layout Section
26111 \begin_inset Index idx
26114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26123 \begin_layout Standard
26124 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26137 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26139 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26140 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26141 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26150 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26154 \begin_inset space ~
26159 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26162 \begin_layout Standard
26163 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26164 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26167 \begin_layout Standard
26168 This is a line with an inline formula
26169 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26175 \begin_layout Standard
26176 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26177 paragraph, like this one:
26178 \begin_inset Formula
26185 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26188 \begin_layout Standard
26190 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26192 For example, typing
26193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26206 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26207 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26211 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26214 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_layout Subsection
26223 Navigating in Formulas
26224 \begin_inset Index idx
26227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26236 \begin_layout Standard
26237 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26238 achieved with the arrow keys.
26240 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26241 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26246 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26247 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26251 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26255 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26258 \end{array}\right]$
26266 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26271 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26272 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26275 \begin_layout Standard
26280 , printed in this document as
26281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26285 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26292 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26293 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26294 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26299 For example, if you want
26300 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26308 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26318 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26322 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26327 , since in the latter case only the
26330 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26335 will be under the square root sign:
26336 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26342 \begin_layout Standard
26343 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26345 \begin_inset Formula
26347 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26356 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26357 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26360 \begin_layout Subsection
26364 \begin_layout Standard
26365 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26366 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26370 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26371 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26372 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26373 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26374 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26378 \begin_layout Subsection
26379 Exponents and Subscripts
26380 \begin_inset Index idx
26383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26390 \begin_inset Index idx
26393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26402 \begin_layout Standard
26403 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26406 arg "math-superscript"
26412 arg "math-subscript"
26415 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26417 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26420 , type in a formula
26423 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26433 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26439 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26443 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26449 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26455 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26464 , you have to use an extra
26468 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26469 For example, if you want
26470 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26476 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26482 Subscripts are similar: To get
26483 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26489 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26497 \begin_layout Subsection
26499 \begin_inset Index idx
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_layout Standard
26512 Create a fraction either with the command
26518 or by using the icon
26521 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26527 \begin_inset space ~
26533 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26534 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26535 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26540 To move back up, press
26545 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26546 \begin_inset Formula
26548 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26551 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26559 \begin_layout Subsection
26561 \begin_inset Index idx
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26573 \begin_layout Standard
26574 Roots can be created using the
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26585 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26591 arg "math-insert \\root"
26613 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26619 always produces a square root.
26622 \begin_layout Subsection
26623 Operators with Limits
26624 \begin_inset Index idx
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26634 \begin_inset Index idx
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26646 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26653 \begin_layout Standard
26655 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26659 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26662 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26663 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26664 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26665 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26666 The sum operator will automatically place its
26667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26674 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26676 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26680 \begin_inset Formula
26682 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26687 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26691 \begin_layout Standard
26692 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26694 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26695 behind the operator and using the menu
26697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26698 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26700 \begin_inset space ~
26704 \begin_inset space ~
26718 \begin_layout Standard
26719 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26728 \begin_inset Index idx
26731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26738 \begin_inset Formula
26740 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26745 which will place the
26746 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26758 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26759 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26765 \begin_layout Standard
26766 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26773 Have a look at section
26774 \begin_inset space ~
26778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26780 reference "subsec:Functions"
26784 for an explanation of function macros.
26787 \begin_layout Subsection
26789 \begin_inset Index idx
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26801 \begin_layout Standard
26802 Most math symbols can be found in the
26805 \begin_inset space ~
26810 under one of several categories; including
26827 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26831 \begin_layout Standard
26832 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26833 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26834 don't have to use the
26837 \begin_inset space ~
26842 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26844 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26847 \begin_layout Subsection
26849 \begin_inset Index idx
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 \begin_layout Standard
26862 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26868 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26874 \begin_inset space ~
26882 arg "math-insert \\space"
26886 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26887 For example, the sequence
26892 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26895 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26897 \begin_inset Graphics
26898 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26903 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26904 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26905 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26906 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26907 , because they are negative
26909 Here are two examples:
26912 \begin_layout Standard
26922 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26938 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26944 \begin_layout Subsection
26946 \begin_inset Index idx
26949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26958 name "subsec:Functions"
26965 \begin_layout Standard
26969 \begin_inset space ~
26974 contains under the button
26977 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26980 a number of function macros, such as
26981 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26985 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26993 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27000 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27001 avoid confusions, because
27002 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27006 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27015 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27019 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27027 are placed, as described in section
27028 \begin_inset space ~
27032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27034 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27041 \begin_layout Subsection
27043 \begin_inset Index idx
27046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27055 \begin_layout Standard
27056 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27058 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27059 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27060 commands, for example, to enter
27061 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27064 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27065 Our example is entered by typing
27070 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27077 \begin_inset space ~
27081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27083 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27087 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27091 \begin_inset Float table
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27099 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27104 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27108 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27118 \begin_inset Tabular
27119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27120 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27261 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27315 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27369 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27423 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27477 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27531 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27585 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27639 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27705 \begin_layout Standard
27706 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27709 \begin_inset space ~
27717 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27720 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27724 \begin_layout Section
27725 Brackets and Delimiters
27726 \begin_inset Index idx
27729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27736 \begin_inset Index idx
27739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27748 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27755 \begin_layout Standard
27756 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27758 For some purposes, using just the keys
27763 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27764 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27765 toolbar delimiter icon
27768 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27772 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27773 \begin_inset Formula
27775 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27783 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27784 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27788 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27791 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27797 \begin_inset Formula
27799 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27807 \begin_layout Standard
27808 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27809 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27813 \begin_layout Standard
27814 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27815 left side and right side.
27816 If you use the option
27819 \begin_inset space ~
27824 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27825 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27827 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27832 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27833 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27837 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27838 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27839 is to go inside the brackets.
27840 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27845 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27846 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27847 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27851 arg "math-delim ( )"
27857 \begin_layout Section
27858 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27859 \begin_inset Index idx
27862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 \begin_inset Index idx
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27879 \begin_inset Index idx
27882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27891 \begin_layout Standard
27892 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27896 \begin_inset space ~
27904 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27908 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27909 Here is an example:
27910 \begin_inset Formula
27912 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27921 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27922 \begin_inset space ~
27926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27928 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27933 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27934 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27935 This alignment is set in the box
27940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27989 for every column as default.
27990 For example, the sequence
27991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28002 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28003 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28004 corresponds to the relevant column.
28005 The result will look like this:
28006 \begin_inset Formula
28009 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28010 column & has & has\,right\\
28011 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28024 arg "newline-insert newline"
28027 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28028 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28033 or the math toolbar.
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28037 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28038 It can be created with the menu
28040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28041 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28043 \begin_inset space ~
28055 Here is an example:
28056 \begin_inset Formula
28070 \begin_layout Standard
28071 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28074 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28077 arg "newline-insert newline"
28081 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28086 arg "newline-insert newline"
28089 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28097 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28098 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28099 A new row is created by every further entry of
28102 arg "newline-insert newline"
28106 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28107 Here is an example:
28108 \begin_inset Formula
28110 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28111 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28116 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28117 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28118 \begin_inset Formula
28120 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28128 \begin_layout Standard
28129 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28136 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28137 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28140 reference "eq:asquared"
28145 The other types are described in section
28146 \begin_inset space ~
28150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28152 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28159 \begin_layout Section
28160 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28161 \begin_inset Index idx
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28165 Math ! Formula numbering
28171 \begin_inset Index idx
28174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28175 Math ! Referencing formulas
28181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28183 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28193 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28194 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28196 \begin_inset space ~
28200 \begin_inset space ~
28208 arg "math-number-toggle"
28212 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28213 within parentheses.
28214 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28215 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28216 the document class.
28217 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28218 separated by a dot:
28219 \begin_inset Formula
28229 arg "math-number-toggle"
28232 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28233 You can only number displayed formulas.
28236 \begin_layout Standard
28237 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28240 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28242 \begin_inset space ~
28246 \begin_inset space ~
28254 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28257 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28258 \begin_inset Formula
28261 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28267 To number all lines use the shortcut
28270 arg "math-number-toggle"
28276 \begin_layout Standard
28277 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28280 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28281 A label is inserted with the menu
28283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28292 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28293 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28294 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28306 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28307 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28308 We inserted in the following example the label
28309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28316 in the second line:
28317 \begin_inset Formula
28319 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28320 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28325 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28326 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28327 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28329 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28339 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28343 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28344 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28345 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28346 as the formula number:
28349 \begin_layout Standard
28350 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28353 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28360 \begin_layout Standard
28361 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28362 's cross-reference box are described in section
28363 \begin_inset space ~
28367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28369 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28374 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28382 \begin_layout Section
28383 User defined math macros
28384 \begin_inset Index idx
28387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28396 \begin_layout Standard
28398 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28399 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28400 Math macros are explained in section
28403 \begin_inset space ~
28415 \begin_layout Section
28419 \begin_layout Subsection
28421 \begin_inset Index idx
28424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28434 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28435 To set a font in a formula, use the
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28446 arg "math-insert \\font"
28449 , or enter its command, listed in table
28450 \begin_inset space ~
28454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28456 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28463 \begin_layout Standard
28464 \begin_inset Float table
28471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28472 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28477 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28481 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 \begin_inset Tabular
28492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28493 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28527 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28554 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28581 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28663 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28669 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28670 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28683 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28699 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28755 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28761 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28769 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28782 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28798 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28832 \begin_layout Standard
28833 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28841 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28844 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28846 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28850 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28870 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28871 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28876 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28877 space when you need a space in the box.
28878 Here is an example where
28879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28890 denotes the set of numbers:
28891 \begin_inset Formula
28893 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28902 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28903 You can, for example, put a character in
28912 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28916 \begin_inset Newline newline
28919 So it is better not to use this feature.
28922 \begin_layout Standard
28923 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28924 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28928 \begin_inset Newline newline
28931 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28937 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28938 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28944 \begin_layout Standard
28951 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28954 \begin_layout Standard
28955 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28958 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28960 \begin_inset space ~
28968 \begin_layout Subsection
28970 \begin_inset Index idx
28973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28982 \begin_layout Standard
28983 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28985 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28989 \begin_inset space ~
28993 \begin_inset space ~
29001 \begin_inset space ~
29009 arg "math-insert \\font"
29013 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29014 in black instead of blue.
29015 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29016 Here is an example:
29017 \begin_inset Formula
29020 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29021 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29030 \begin_layout Subsection
29032 \begin_inset Index idx
29035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29044 \begin_layout Standard
29045 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29046 automatically chosen in most situations.
29064 For most characters,
29072 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29073 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29078 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29079 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29080 thinks are appropriate.
29081 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29084 arg "math-insert \\style"
29088 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29089 For example, you can set
29090 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29093 , which is normally in
29102 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29106 The four styles are used in the following example:
29109 \begin_layout Standard
29110 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29114 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29118 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29122 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29128 \begin_layout Standard
29129 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29130 is set in a particular size with the menu
29132 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29134 \begin_inset space ~
29139 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29140 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29141 will be adjusted to correspond.
29142 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29153 \begin_layout Standard
29157 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29163 \begin_layout Section
29164 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29166 \begin_inset Index idx
29169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29176 \begin_inset Index idx
29179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29188 \begin_layout Standard
29190 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29191 that are in common use.
29194 \begin_layout Subsection
29195 Enabling AMS-Support
29198 \begin_layout Standard
29199 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29200 the document by selecting the checkbox
29203 \begin_inset space ~
29207 \begin_inset space ~
29211 \begin_inset space ~
29218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29222 \begin_inset Index idx
29225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 Document ! Settings
29234 \begin_inset space ~
29240 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29241 -errors in formulas,
29242 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29245 \begin_layout Subsection
29247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29249 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29254 \begin_inset Index idx
29257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29258 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29266 \begin_layout Standard
29267 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29268 provides a selection of different formula types.
29270 allows you to choose between
29291 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29299 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29302 \begin_layout Chapter
29306 \begin_layout Section
29308 \begin_inset Index idx
29311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29320 name "sec:Cross-References"
29327 \begin_layout Standard
29328 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29329 's strengths is cross-references.
29330 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29332 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29333 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29334 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29337 \begin_layout Enumerate
29341 \begin_layout Enumerate
29342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29344 name "enu:Second-item"
29351 \begin_layout Enumerate
29355 \begin_layout Standard
29356 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29361 or by pressing the toolbar button
29368 A gray label box like this:
29369 \begin_inset Graphics
29370 filename clipart/label.png
29374 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29376 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29411 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29412 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29429 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29434 or the toolbar button
29437 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29441 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29442 \begin_inset Graphics
29443 filename clipart/reference.png
29447 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29449 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29462 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29466 \begin_layout Standard
29467 As an alternative to
29469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29472 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29477 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29478 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29480 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29492 \begin_layout Standard
29493 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29494 \begin_inset space ~
29498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29500 reference "enu:Second-item"
29507 \begin_layout Standard
29508 It is recommended to use a protected space
29512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29513 described in section
29514 \begin_inset space ~
29518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29520 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29529 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29530 line breaks between them.
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29534 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29537 \begin_layout Description
29538 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29541 reference "fig:Two-images"
29548 \begin_layout Description
29549 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29550 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29562 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29569 \begin_layout Description
29570 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29576 LatexCommand pageref
29577 reference "fig:Two-images"
29584 \begin_layout Description
29586 \begin_inset space ~
29590 \begin_inset space ~
29593 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29595 LatexCommand vpageref
29596 reference "fig:Two-images"
29601 \begin_inset Newline newline
29604 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29605 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29606 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29607 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29608 it prints “on the next page”.
29609 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29612 \begin_layout Description
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29622 \begin_inset space ~
29625 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29628 reference "fig:Two-images"
29633 \begin_inset Newline newline
29636 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29642 ; otherwise it behaves like
29646 \begin_inset space ~
29650 \begin_inset space ~
29659 \begin_layout Description
29661 \begin_inset space ~
29664 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29665 \begin_inset Newline newline
29669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29677 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29687 \begin_inset Index idx
29690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29692 packages ! prettyref
29698 \begin_inset Index idx
29701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29703 packages ! refstyle
29714 \begin_inset Newline newline
29717 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29718 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29721 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29726 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29734 is the default and preferred because
29738 supports only English documents.
29739 The format is specified by using the command
29751 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29752 preamble of the document.
29753 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29771 \begin_inset Newline newline
29778 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29783 \begin_inset Newline newline
29794 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29795 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29797 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29798 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29803 , you might do so as follows:
29804 \begin_inset Newline newline
29811 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29816 \begin_inset Newline newline
29819 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29820 the package documentation
29821 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29823 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29829 \begin_inset Newline newline
29840 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29847 \begin_layout Description
29849 \begin_inset space ~
29852 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29854 LatexCommand nameref
29855 reference "fig:Two-images"
29862 \begin_layout Description
29864 \begin_inset space ~
29867 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29868 label for the reference:
29869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29870 LatexCommand labelonly
29871 reference "fig:Two-images"
29876 \begin_inset Newline newline
29879 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29880 Code, if you want to issue a command
29881 that \SpecialChar LyX
29887 , then you may want to use the
29890 \begin_inset space ~
29895 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29905 This is the form needed for e.
29906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29910 \begin_inset space \space{}
29917 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29918 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29920 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29924 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29928 \begin_layout Standard
29929 You can only use the style
29933 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29937 is always possible.
29940 \begin_layout Standard
29941 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29942 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29944 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29945 \begin_inset space ~
29949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29951 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29959 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29963 \begin_inset space ~
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29972 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29973 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29981 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29982 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29985 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 You can change labels at any time.
29993 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29994 do not need to think about this.
29997 \begin_layout Standard
29998 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30000 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30004 \begin_layout Standard
30005 References are described in detail in the section
30006 \begin_inset space ~
30016 \begin_inset space ~
30024 \begin_layout Section
30025 Table of Contents and other Listings
30026 \begin_inset Index idx
30029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 \begin_inset Index idx
30039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30040 Navigating ! Outline
30046 \begin_inset Index idx
30049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30065 \begin_layout Subsection
30067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30069 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30076 \begin_layout Standard
30077 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30080 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30082 \begin_inset space ~
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30092 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30094 If you click on it, the
30098 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30099 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30100 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30102 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30104 \begin_inset space ~
30109 that is described in section
30110 \begin_inset space ~
30114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30116 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30123 \begin_layout Standard
30124 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30125 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30127 \begin_inset space ~
30131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30133 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30137 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30139 \begin_inset space ~
30143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30145 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30149 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30151 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30154 \begin_layout Subsection
30155 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30158 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30166 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30168 You can insert them via the
30170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30171 List/Contents/References
30174 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30177 \begin_layout Section
30178 URLs and Hyperlinks
30179 \begin_inset Index idx
30182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30189 \begin_inset Index idx
30192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30201 \begin_layout Subsection
30203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30213 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30221 \begin_layout Standard
30222 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30224 \begin_inset Flex URL
30227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30229 https://www.lyx.org
30237 \begin_layout Standard
30238 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30244 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30257 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30266 \begin_layout Subsection
30268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30270 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30278 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30283 or with the toolbar button
30290 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30299 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30300 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30303 name "LyX's homepage"
30304 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30309 , an Email address like this:
30310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30312 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30313 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30319 , or a link to a file.
30324 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30332 \begin_layout Standard
30333 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30346 to the link target.
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30350 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30351 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30352 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30353 the text style dialog.
30354 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30360 name "LyX's homepage"
30361 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30370 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30374 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30377 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30381 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30383 \begin_inset Newline newline
30391 \begin_inset Newline newline
30398 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30399 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30403 \begin_layout Section
30405 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30407 \begin_inset Index idx
30410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30419 name "sec:Counters"
30426 \begin_layout Standard
30428 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30429 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30430 is its ability to manage counters.
30431 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30432 modify counters directly.
30433 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30435 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30436 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30437 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30438 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30439 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30445 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30446 There are five commands you can use:
30449 \begin_layout Enumerate
30451 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30452 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30455 \begin_layout Enumerate
30457 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30458 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30459 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30462 \begin_layout Enumerate
30464 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30465 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30468 \begin_layout Enumerate
30470 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30471 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30475 \begin_layout Enumerate
30477 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30478 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30481 \begin_layout Standard
30483 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30484 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30485 those that are available in the current document class.
30490 \begin_layout Section
30492 \begin_inset Index idx
30495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30504 name "sec:Appendices"
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 Appendices are created with the menu
30514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30516 \begin_inset space ~
30520 \begin_inset space ~
30526 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30527 as the appendix part of the book.
30528 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30532 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30533 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30534 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30535 and the subsection number.
30536 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30540 \begin_layout Standard
30542 \begin_inset space ~
30546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30548 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30556 \begin_inset space ~
30560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30562 reference "subsec:Export"
30569 \begin_layout Section
30571 \begin_inset Index idx
30574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30583 name "sec:Bibliography"
30590 \begin_layout Standard
30591 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30593 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30594 \begin_inset space ~
30598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30600 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30607 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30612 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30613 \begin_inset space ~
30617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30619 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30624 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30625 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30626 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30630 using a bibliography database.
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30634 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30635 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30639 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30640 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30641 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30642 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30643 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30646 \begin_layout Subsection
30647 The Bibliography Environment
30648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30650 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30662 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30664 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30673 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30675 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30676 of ASCII characters only.
30680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30685 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30691 \begin_inset Newline newline
30695 \begin_inset Flex URL
30698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30700 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30710 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30720 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30721 \begin_inset Newline newline
30728 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30729 the number of the entry.
30734 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30743 \begin_layout Standard
30744 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30749 or the toolbar button
30752 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30756 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30757 containing the available citations.
30758 Select one or more keys from the list and
30768 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30769 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30773 \begin_layout Standard
30774 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30775 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30776 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30792 Companion Second Edition
30795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30797 key "latexcompanion"
30805 \begin_layout Standard
30806 The \SpecialChar LyX
30807 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30826 \begin_inset Index idx
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30838 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30839 the label needs to be given the form
30840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30851 Author A and Author B(Year)
30852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30859 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30866 \begin_inset space ~
30871 in the document settings
30872 \begin_inset Index idx
30875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30876 Document ! Settings
30883 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30885 \begin_inset space ~
30891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30893 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30901 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30903 Once you have done that, the
30907 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30924 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30925 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30926 These two are madatory.
30927 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30930 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30932 ) and in abrreviated form (
30939 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30940 add the abbreviated form to
30944 and the full list to the optional
30952 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30953 If specified like this,
30955 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30956 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30966 is specified, toggling
30967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30974 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30975 full and abbreviated list
30979 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30980 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30981 the citation references.
30982 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30987 \begin_layout Standard
30988 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30991 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30993 \begin_inset space ~
31001 arg "layout-paragraph"
31005 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31008 \begin_layout Subsection
31009 Bibliography databases
31010 \begin_inset Index idx
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31014 Bibliography ! Databases
31020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31022 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31029 \begin_layout Standard
31030 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31036 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31038 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31039 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31044 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31046 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31047 your working field in a database.
31048 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31049 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31050 list for that document.
31051 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31055 \begin_layout Standard
31056 The database is a text file with the file extension
31057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31068 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31069 The format is explained in
31070 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31077 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31081 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31087 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31088 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31089 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31091 \begin_inset Flex URL
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31096 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31104 \begin_layout Standard
31106 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31107 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31108 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31110 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31112 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31113 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31114 Those are addressed by
31119 \begin_inset Index idx
31122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 packages ! biblatex
31130 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31131 (although it has been significantly
31132 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31143 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31144 might conversely fail to correctly
31145 handle databases that use specific
31154 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31158 \begin_layout Standard
31159 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31164 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31170 \begin_inset Index idx
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31174 Document ! Settings
31186 \begin_inset space ~
31191 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31200 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31202 \begin_inset Index idx
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31206 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31215 \begin_layout Standard
31216 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31220 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31222 \begin_inset space ~
31228 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31229 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31237 Add bibliography to TOC
31239 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31244 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31245 in the document or just the cited references.
31247 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31252 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31253 differ from the encoding of the document.
31258 \begin_layout Standard
31259 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31260 style file is a text file with the file extension
31261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31272 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31273 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31274 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31275 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31277 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31284 \begin_inset Newline newline
31288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31290 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31300 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31305 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31309 \begin_layout Standard
31310 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31315 \begin_inset Index idx
31318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31319 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31325 \begin_inset Index idx
31328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31330 packages ! biblatex
31338 \begin_layout Standard
31339 Accessing a database via
31343 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31347 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31349 \begin_inset space ~
31355 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31356 you cannot select a
31361 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31365 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31368 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31369 As for the styles, note the following.
31374 \begin_layout Standard
31379 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31392 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31393 file (text file with the file extension
31394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31405 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31406 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31408 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31412 \begin_layout Standard
31417 styles are not set in the
31420 \begin_inset space ~
31425 dialog, but in the document settings.
31426 \begin_inset Index idx
31429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31430 Document ! Settings
31435 However, in the dialog in the
31439 field, which is only visible if you use
31443 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31444 example how its heading will appear).
31445 These options are described in detail in the
31450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31460 \begin_layout Standard
31461 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31462 \begin_inset space ~
31466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31468 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31479 Bibliography Processors
31482 \begin_layout Standard
31483 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31484 uses a bibliography processor,
31485 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31486 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31487 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31489 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31490 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31493 \begin_layout Standard
31494 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31496 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31497 You can do this on a general level in
31499 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31500 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31501 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31504 or for individual documents in
31506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31507 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31511 The following variants are available by default:
31514 \begin_layout Description
31515 biber a specific, modern processor
31516 \begin_inset Index idx
31519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31526 developed exclusively for
31530 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31536 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31541 makes use of; if you use the
31545 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31552 \begin_layout Description
31553 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31554 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31555 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31559 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31562 \begin_layout Description
31563 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31564 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31568 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31572 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31576 features are supported.
31579 \begin_layout Standard
31580 By default (with the
31586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31587 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31602 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31605 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31606 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31619 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31620 -based bibliography styles).
31621 This should suit most needs.
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31625 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31626 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31627 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31632 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31633 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31634 You can adjust it in
31636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31637 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31638 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31644 \begin_layout Standard
31645 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31646 can add below the selection.
31647 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31648 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31654 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31668 \begin_layout Standard
31670 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31672 These are explained in detail in section
31674 Customizing Bibliographies
31678 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31683 Additional Features
31688 \begin_layout Subsection
31690 \begin_inset Index idx
31693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31694 Bibliography ! Citation format
31700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31702 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31715 \begin_inset space \space{}
31718 numerical citation (as
31719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31726 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31734 ) or author-year citations (as
31735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31744 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31752 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31753 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31757 \begin_inset Index idx
31760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31761 Document ! Settings
31766 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31772 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31773 labels, is there to use
31776 \begin_inset space ~
31787 \begin_inset space ~
31792 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31795 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31802 \begin_layout Standard
31803 With a bibliography database (see
31804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31806 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31813 ) one has in contrary to the
31817 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31818 These style formats are available:
31821 \begin_layout Description
31823 \begin_inset space ~
31826 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31827 -based approached without any additional packages
31828 (simple numeric citations).
31831 \begin_layout Description
31832 Biblatex loads the package
31837 \begin_inset Index idx
31840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31842 packages ! biblatex
31847 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31849 Biblatex citation style
31853 Biblatex bibliography style
31856 Options to the package
31860 can be entered in the
31867 \begin_layout Description
31869 \begin_inset space ~
31873 \begin_inset space ~
31876 mode) loads the package
31880 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31881 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31893 behavior very closely.
31898 this option has some additional styles.
31903 styles are also supported by this variant.
31906 \begin_layout Description
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31911 (BibTeX) loads the package
31916 \begin_inset Index idx
31919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31926 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31929 \begin_layout Description
31931 \begin_inset space ~
31934 (BibTeX) loads the package
31939 \begin_inset Index idx
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31952 \begin_layout Standard
31961 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31963 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31972 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31974 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31975 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31977 Biblatex citation style
31980 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31986 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31990 \begin_layout Standard
31991 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31992 are available in the
31997 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31998 a name prefix such as
31999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32014 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32019 \begin_inset space \space{}
32023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32034 \begin_layout Standard
32035 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32041 \begin_inset space \space{}
32044 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32050 \begin_inset space \space{}
32054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32066 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32070 \begin_inset space ~
32078 \begin_inset space ~
32084 Here is a simple example where the text
32085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32089 \begin_inset space ~
32093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32096 appears after the reference:
32099 \begin_layout Quote
32101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32104 key "latexcompanion"
32112 \begin_layout Standard
32113 All styles except for
32117 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32127 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32131 \begin_layout Standard
32132 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32133 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32134 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32139 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32140 multi-citation (so-called
32141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32144 qualified citation lists
32145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32151 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32156 dialog will display three columns in the field
32163 \begin_inset space ~
32171 \begin_inset space ~
32179 \begin_inset space ~
32185 If you double-click on an item's
32188 \begin_inset space ~
32196 \begin_inset space ~
32201 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32204 General text before
32210 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32213 \begin_layout Section
32215 \begin_inset Index idx
32218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32234 \begin_layout Standard
32235 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32239 \begin_inset space ~
32244 or the toolbar button
32251 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32252 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32253 by \SpecialChar LyX
32254 as the index entry.
32257 \begin_layout Standard
32258 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32261 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32263 \begin_inset space ~
32269 A light blue box labeled
32270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32281 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32282 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32287 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32288 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32289 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32290 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32294 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32302 \begin_layout Subsection
32303 Grouping Index Entries
32304 \begin_inset Index idx
32307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32316 \begin_layout Standard
32317 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32319 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32320 lists under the entry
32321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32329 First we create the entry
32330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32338 \begin_inset space ~
32342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32344 reference "subsec:Lists"
32349 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32356 reference "sec:Itemize"
32360 , we insert the command
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32369 \begin_layout Standard
32373 \begin_layout Standard
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32380 for the enumerated list in section
32381 \begin_inset space ~
32385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32387 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32394 \begin_layout Standard
32395 The exclamation mark
32396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32403 marks the grouping levels.
32404 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32405 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32406 If we don't have an index entry for
32407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32414 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32417 \begin_layout Subsection
32419 \begin_inset Index idx
32422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32423 Index ! Page ranges
32431 \begin_layout Standard
32432 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32434 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32435 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32436 an index entry in section
32437 \begin_inset space ~
32441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32443 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32450 \begin_layout Standard
32453 Paragraph environments|(
32456 \begin_layout Standard
32457 and another entry at the end of section
32458 \begin_inset space ~
32462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32464 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32471 \begin_layout Standard
32474 Paragraph environments|)
32477 \begin_layout Standard
32479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32502 respectively start and end the index range.
32503 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32504 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32505 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32506 An example is the index entry
32507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32510 Document ! Settings
32511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32517 \begin_layout Subsection
32519 \begin_inset Index idx
32522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32523 Index ! Cross referencing
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32533 We referred for example in the index entry
32534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32542 \begin_inset space ~
32546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32548 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32552 ) to the index entry
32553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32560 in the same section using the entry
32563 \begin_layout Standard
32566 GIF|see{Image formats}
32569 \begin_layout Standard
32570 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32572 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32573 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32576 \begin_layout Subsection
32578 \begin_inset Index idx
32581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32582 Index ! Entry order
32590 \begin_layout Standard
32591 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32592 follow the rules for the index order.
32593 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32599 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32601 \begin_inset space ~
32605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32607 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32616 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32617 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32642 \begin_inset Index idx
32645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32646 Dummy entries ! maïs
32652 \begin_inset Index idx
32655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32656 Dummy entries ! maître
32662 \begin_inset Index idx
32665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32666 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32671 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32672 maïs, maison, maître.
32673 To achieve this, we use the command
32676 \begin_layout Standard
32679 previous entry@current entry
32682 \begin_layout Standard
32683 In our case we want to have
32684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32699 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32702 \begin_layout Standard
32708 \begin_layout Standard
32709 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32710 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32712 See the next subsection for an example.
32715 \begin_layout Subsection
32717 \begin_inset Index idx
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 Index ! Entry layout
32729 \begin_layout Standard
32730 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32731 \begin_inset Index idx
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32737 This is an italic dummy entry
32742 You can also format the page number using the character
32743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32750 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32751 -command without a backslash.
32752 We can write for example
32755 \begin_layout Standard
32758 italic page number:|textit
32761 \begin_layout Standard
32762 to get the page number in italic.
32763 \begin_inset Index idx
32766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32767 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32772 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32773 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32791 \begin_inset space ~
32797 Have a look at section
32798 \begin_inset space ~
32802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32804 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32808 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32812 \begin_layout Standard
32813 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32821 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32825 to generate the index, see section
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32832 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32841 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32846 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32847 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32850 key "latexcompanion"
32863 \begin_layout Standard
32864 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32866 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32867 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32868 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32869 If so, put the following in the preamble
32872 \begin_layout Standard
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32888 \begin_layout Standard
32894 \begin_layout Standard
32895 in the index entry.
32896 \begin_inset Index idx
32899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32900 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32905 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32906 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32907 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32910 \begin_layout Standard
32911 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32912 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32913 a bold font for all index entries.
32914 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32926 documentation for details,
32927 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32929 key "makeindex,xindy"
32937 \begin_layout Subsection
32939 \begin_inset Index idx
32942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32951 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32958 \begin_layout Standard
32959 If the index generation program
32963 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32964 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32968 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32969 distribution, is used.
32973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32978 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32979 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32980 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32981 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32982 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32992 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32994 dialog, see section
32995 \begin_inset space ~
32999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33001 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33006 The available options are listed and explained in
33007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33009 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33015 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33019 \begin_layout Standard
33020 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33021 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33025 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33029 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33030 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33033 \begin_layout Subsection
33037 \begin_layout Standard
33038 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33039 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33047 next to the standard index.
33049 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33050 that add this feature.
33057 \begin_inset Index idx
33060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33062 packages ! splitidx
33067 package to generate multiple indexes.
33068 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33074 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33076 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33084 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33085 style, but it also includes
33086 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33087 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33095 \begin_layout Standard
33096 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33097 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33103 and select the option
33105 Use multiple Indexes
33112 already contains the standard index
33113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33121 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33122 also appear as a heading) to the
33126 input field and press the
33131 The new index now also appears in the list.
33132 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33133 label color to the new index.
33136 \begin_layout Standard
33137 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33141 List/Contents/References
33147 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33148 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33149 are additional features:
33152 \begin_layout Itemize
33153 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33154 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33157 \begin_layout Itemize
33158 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33159 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33164 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33165 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33166 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33167 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33170 \begin_layout Itemize
33175 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33176 code in the name of the index.
33179 \begin_layout Section
33180 Nomenclature/Glossary
33181 \begin_inset Index idx
33184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33191 \begin_inset Index idx
33194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33225 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33232 \begin_layout Standard
33233 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33234 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33235 called nomenclature or glossary.
33238 \begin_layout Standard
33239 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33246 \begin_inset Index idx
33249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33257 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33266 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33271 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33272 and then use the menu
33274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33280 \begin_inset space ~
33285 or the toolbar button
33288 arg "nomencl-insert"
33293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33304 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33307 \begin_layout Standard
33308 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33309 The first is the term or
33313 that you wish to define.
33318 of the term or symbol.
33321 \begin_layout Standard
33322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33330 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33331 code for nomenclature entries the option
33335 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33343 \begin_layout Subsection
33344 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33345 \begin_inset Index idx
33348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 Nomenclature ! Layout
33357 \begin_layout Standard
33358 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33362 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33369 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33377 \begin_inset Newline newline
33385 \begin_inset Newline newline
33391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33398 character starts/ends the formula.
33399 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33400 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33412 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33424 syntax is given in section
33425 \begin_inset space ~
33429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33431 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33438 \begin_layout Standard
33442 \begin_inset space ~
33447 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33449 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33454 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33461 in this document is:
33462 \begin_inset Newline newline
33467 dummy entry for the character
33472 \begin_inset Newline newline
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33494 font use the command
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33529 \begin_inset space \space{}
33533 \begin_inset Newline newline
33549 \begin_inset Newline newline
33552 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33553 This command will make the font of all symbols
33560 \begin_inset space ~
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33569 If the characters |
33570 \begin_inset space \space{}
33574 \begin_inset space \space{}
33578 \begin_inset space \space{}
33582 \begin_inset space \space{}
33586 \begin_inset space \space{}
33589 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33590 code they need to be escaped
33591 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33592 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33593 LatexCommand nomenclature
33594 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33595 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33603 \begin_layout Subsection
33604 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33605 \begin_inset Index idx
33608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33617 \begin_layout Standard
33618 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33619 -code of the symbol
33621 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33623 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33626 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33627 LatexCommand nomenclature
33629 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33637 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33641 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33642 LatexCommand nomenclature
33645 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33651 They will be sorted by
33652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33678 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33681 will be sorted before the
33685 since the character
33686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33693 is considered in sorting.
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33697 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33705 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33706 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33708 For the example given, you can insert
33712 in this field for the
33713 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33720 will be located before
33721 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33727 \begin_layout Standard
33728 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33733 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33743 \begin_layout Subsection
33744 Nomenclature Options
33745 \begin_inset Index idx
33748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 Nomenclature ! Options
33755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33757 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33764 \begin_layout Standard
33769 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33770 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33773 \begin_layout Description
33774 refeq Appends the phrase
33775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33790 to every nomenclature entry, where
33796 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33799 \begin_layout Description
33800 refpage Appends the phrase
33801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33816 to every nomenclature entry, where
33822 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33825 \begin_layout Description
33826 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33830 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33831 class options list in the
33833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33837 In this document the options
33844 \begin_layout Standard
33845 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33853 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33858 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33861 \begin_layout Description
33871 \begin_layout Description
33874 nomrefpage Like the
33881 \begin_layout Description
33884 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33893 \begin_layout Description
33897 \begin_inset space ~
33903 \begin_inset space ~
33908 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33920 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33921 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33925 \begin_layout Standard
33934 \begin_inset Newline newline
33940 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 \begin_inset space ~
33956 unskip, see equation
33959 \begin_inset Newline newline
33966 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33967 \begin_inset Newline newline
33973 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33995 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34003 in the document settings under
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34014 \begin_layout Standard
34022 \begin_inset Newline newline
34026 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34042 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34044 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34045 \begin_inset Newline newline
34052 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34053 \begin_inset Newline newline
34057 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34061 \begin_inset space ~
34073 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34078 \begin_layout Subsection
34079 Printing the Nomenclature
34080 \begin_inset Index idx
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34084 Nomenclature ! Printing
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34093 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34096 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34112 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34113 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34114 You can choose between these settings:
34117 \begin_layout Description
34118 Default a space of 1
34119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34125 \begin_layout Description
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34131 \begin_inset space ~
34134 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34137 \begin_layout Description
34138 Custom custom space
34141 \begin_layout Standard
34142 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34151 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34159 For example, in order to change the name to
34163 , add the following line to the preamble:
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34179 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34182 \begin_layout Standard
34183 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34184 \begin_inset Newline newline
34199 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34202 \begin_layout Subsection
34203 Nomenclature Program
34204 \begin_inset Index idx
34207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34208 Nomenclature ! Program
34214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34216 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34223 \begin_layout Standard
34229 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34230 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34232 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34237 by adding options, see section
34238 \begin_inset space ~
34242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34244 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34249 The available options are listed and explained in
34250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34252 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34260 \begin_layout Section
34262 \begin_inset Index idx
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34272 \begin_inset Index idx
34275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34276 Document ! Branches
34282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34284 name "sec:Branches"
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34293 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34294 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34295 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34300 allows you to put text into branches.
34301 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34302 To create a branch, either select the menu
34304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34305 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34308 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34317 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34318 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34319 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34320 and whether the name of the branch should
34321 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34322 (see below for an example).
34323 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34324 to the name of the other) and to add
34325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34340 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34341 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34346 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34351 where you can choose a branch.
34352 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34358 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34361 \begin_layout Standard
34362 \begin_inset Branch Question
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34371 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34389 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34397 \begin_layout Standard
34404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34405 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34408 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34409 Consider for example a file
34410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34417 which has the above branches.
34419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34426 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34450 branch were inactive,
34451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34466 branch was active, likewise
34467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34482 branch was active, and
34483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34486 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34490 if both branches were active.
34491 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34492 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34505 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34506 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34510 \begin_inset space ~
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34519 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34523 \begin_layout Standard
34529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34536 branch is deactivated.
34542 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34548 \begin_layout Standard
34549 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34550 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34551 definitions for each branch.
34552 For example you can define for the question branch
34556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34557 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34558 -syntax, see section
34559 \begin_inset space ~
34563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34565 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34577 \begin_layout Standard
34587 \begin_layout Standard
34597 \begin_layout Standard
34598 and for the answer branch
34601 \begin_layout Standard
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 \begin_inset Branch Question
34626 \begin_layout Standard
34630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34659 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34695 \begin_layout Standard
34696 Now it is possible to use the
34700 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34707 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34710 commands to obtain conditional output.
34711 Here is an example formula where only the
34718 \begin_inset Formula
34720 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34729 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34737 \begin_layout Standard
34738 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34744 \begin_inset space \space{}
34747 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34749 For this advanced usage, see the
34755 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34760 \begin_layout Section
34762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34764 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34769 \begin_inset Index idx
34772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34781 \begin_layout Standard
34784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34788 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34790 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34796 \begin_inset Index idx
34799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34801 packages ! hyperref
34806 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34807 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34808 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34809 part of the document.
34813 \begin_layout Standard
34814 The header information in the dialog tab
34818 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34819 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34820 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34821 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34829 \begin_inset space ~
34834 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34835 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34836 and author entries.
34840 \begin_inset space ~
34844 \begin_inset space ~
34848 \begin_inset space ~
34853 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34856 \begin_layout Standard
34857 You can specify in the dialog tab
34861 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34866 \begin_inset space ~
34870 \begin_inset space ~
34874 \begin_inset space ~
34879 option allows long links to be split;
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34890 \begin_inset space ~
34898 \begin_inset space ~
34903 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34911 colors the different links.
34912 The default colors are:
34915 \begin_layout Labeling
34916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34921 for hyperlinks and URLs
34924 \begin_layout Labeling
34925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34933 \begin_layout Labeling
34934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34943 but you can change these in the field
34948 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34951 \begin_layout Standard
34954 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34957 \begin_layout Standard
34962 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34963 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34964 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34967 \begin_layout Standard
34972 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34973 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34974 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34984 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34985 when opening the PDF.
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34990 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34991 \begin_inset space ~
34994 1 will only display the sections.
34997 \begin_layout Standard
34998 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34999 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35005 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35016 \begin_layout Section
35018 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35022 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35029 \begin_layout Subsection
35032 \begin_inset Index idx
35035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35045 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35053 As \SpecialChar LyX
35054 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35055 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35056 commands and constructs,
35059 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35060 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35061 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35062 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35063 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35064 cannot support all packages and
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35069 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35070 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35071 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35075 Code box is created by the menu
35077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35079 \begin_inset space ~
35084 or by the toolbar button
35097 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35105 \begin_layout Standard
35106 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35108 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35110 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35115 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35120 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35127 , you can write the command part
35133 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35134 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35138 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35139 Code box behind the word.
35140 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35141 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 \begin_inset Graphics
35147 filename clipart/ERT.png
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35159 \begin_layout Standard
35160 This is a line with a
35164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35196 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35197 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35198 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35199 know that the command is finished.
35207 \begin_layout Subsection
35208 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35210 \begin_inset Argument 1
35213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35221 \begin_inset Index idx
35224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35234 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35241 \begin_layout Standard
35242 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35243 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35244 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35245 uses in the background.
35246 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35247 is based on commands, you can
35248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35256 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35257 any time if you know the right commands.
35258 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35259 is the end of the day.
35260 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35261 all caption labels bold.
35262 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35264 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35268 \begin_layout Standard
35269 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35271 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35273 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35286 \begin_layout Standard
35287 As result you find that the package
35292 \begin_inset Index idx
35295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35308 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35312 \begin_inset space ~
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35325 usepackage[options]{package name}
35328 \begin_layout Standard
35329 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35330 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35331 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35332 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35335 \begin_layout Standard
35336 In your case the package name is
35341 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35346 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35347 So you add the command
35350 \begin_layout Standard
35355 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35358 \begin_layout Standard
35359 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35364 For more commands provided by the
35368 package, have a look at its documentation,
35369 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35385 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35387 For example if you use a
35391 class, you don't need the package
35395 , you can instead write
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35403 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35409 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35410 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35411 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35418 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35421 \begin_layout Standard
35422 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35423 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35425 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35426 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35427 Code box as described in the previous
35431 \begin_layout Standard
35432 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35433 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35438 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35446 \begin_layout Standard
35447 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35453 \begin_layout Standard
35457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 \begin_inset Note Note
35470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35471 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35479 \begin_layout Left Header
35480 \begin_inset Argument 1
35483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35503 \begin_inset Note Note
35506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35507 defines the header line as described below
35515 \begin_layout Center Header
35516 \begin_inset Argument 1
35519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35528 \begin_layout Right Header
35529 \begin_inset Argument 1
35532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35553 \begin_layout Left Footer
35554 \begin_inset Argument 1
35557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35578 \begin_layout Center Footer
35579 \begin_inset Argument 1
35582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35594 \begin_inset Newline newline
35598 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35604 \begin_layout Right Footer
35605 \begin_inset Argument 1
35608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35630 \begin_layout Section
35631 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35634 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35639 \begin_inset Index idx
35642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 Document ! Header/Footer line
35649 \begin_inset Index idx
35652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35661 \begin_layout Standard
35662 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35666 \begin_inset space ~
35677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35689 As a second step add in the menu
35691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35701 Custom Header/Footerlines
35704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35708 This module offers the following 6
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35715 \begin_layout Description
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35721 \begin_inset space ~
35725 \begin_inset space ~
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35739 \begin_layout Description
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35757 \begin_inset space ~
35763 \begin_layout Standard
35764 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35765 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35768 \begin_layout Standard
35769 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35770 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35772 \begin_inset space ~
35776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35778 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35782 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35786 \begin_inset Float figure
35793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35796 \begin_inset Tabular
35797 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35798 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35799 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35801 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35821 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35850 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35861 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35865 The normal text on the page goes here.
35866 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35868 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35869 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35874 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35883 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35912 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35941 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35959 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35964 name "fig:Page-layout"
35968 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35981 \begin_layout Standard
35982 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35990 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35994 \begin_inset space ~
35999 is set to “Default”.
36000 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36009 \begin_layout Subsection
36013 \begin_layout Standard
36014 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36015 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36016 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36017 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36019 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36021 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36024 \begin_layout Standard
36025 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36026 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36032 \begin_inset space ~
36040 \begin_layout Description
36043 thepage prints the current page number
36046 \begin_layout Description
36049 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36052 \begin_layout Description
36055 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36058 \begin_layout Description
36061 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36062 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36069 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36072 because it usually goes in a left header.
36075 \begin_layout Description
36078 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36079 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36081 It is normally used in the right header.
36084 \begin_layout Subsection
36085 Default header/footer
36088 \begin_layout Standard
36089 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36090 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36091 footer has the page number.
36092 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36093 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36094 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_layout Subsection
36109 \begin_layout Standard
36110 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36111 Some pages are different.
36112 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36113 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36114 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36115 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36116 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36120 Header and footer decoration line
36123 \begin_layout Standard
36124 By default, you get a 0.4
36125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36128 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36129 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36141 in the following way:
36144 \begin_layout Standard
36151 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36154 \begin_layout Standard
36155 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36168 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36175 \begin_layout Standard
36176 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36178 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36194 Several header/footer lines
36197 \begin_layout Standard
36198 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36199 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36200 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36202 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36218 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36228 \begin_layout Standard
36235 headheight}{height}
36238 \begin_layout Standard
36243 is a size in standard units (e.
36244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36248 \begin_inset space \space{}
36256 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36257 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36258 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36259 logfile with the menu
36261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36276 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36281 \begin_inset Index idx
36284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36286 packages ! fancyhdr
36292 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36293 for your header/footer.
36296 \begin_layout Subsection
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36302 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36303 This example consists of the following definition:
36306 \begin_layout Description
36308 \begin_inset space ~
36317 , empty optional argument
36320 \begin_layout Description
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36325 Header empty, empty optional argument
36328 \begin_layout Description
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36339 in the optional argument
36342 \begin_layout Description
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36353 in the optional argument
36356 \begin_layout Description
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36375 \begin_inset Newline newline
36379 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36386 in the optional argument
36389 \begin_layout Description
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36400 , empty optional argument
36403 \begin_layout Description
36406 headrulewidth set to 2
36407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36413 \begin_layout Standard
36414 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36415 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36431 \begin_layout Standard
36432 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36438 \begin_layout Standard
36442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36446 pagestyle{headings}
36452 \begin_inset Note Note
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36456 switches back to page style with the default headings
36464 \begin_layout Section
36465 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36468 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36473 \begin_inset Index idx
36476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36483 \begin_inset Index idx
36486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36495 \begin_layout Standard
36497 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36498 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36499 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36502 \begin_layout Subsection
36506 \begin_layout Standard
36507 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36513 \begin_inset Index idx
36516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36518 packages ! preview-latex
36523 (on some systems named simply
36528 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36530 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36537 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36539 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36547 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36548 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36549 -package are automatically
36550 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36554 \begin_layout Subsection
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36559 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36560 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36562 activate the option
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36582 \begin_inset space ~
36585 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36605 \begin_inset space ~
36610 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36613 \begin_layout Standard
36614 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36636 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36637 and when you finish
36641 \begin_layout Standard
36642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36650 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36651 generated by activating the option
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36660 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36668 \begin_layout Subsection
36669 Selected document parts
36672 \begin_layout Standard
36673 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36674 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36675 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36676 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36678 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36684 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36685 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36686 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36697 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36709 is explained in section
36711 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36726 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36727 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36728 the final rotated boxes,
36729 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36730 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36732 Here is the result:
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36736 \begin_inset Preview
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36747 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36753 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36763 height_special "totalheight"
36768 backgroundcolor "none"
36771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36796 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36802 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36825 Previewing works also for colors.
36826 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36845 is explained in section
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 \begin_inset Preview
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36891 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36896 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36915 \begin_layout Standard
36916 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36922 \begin_layout Standard
36923 If \SpecialChar LyX
36924 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36925 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36926 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36927 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36928 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36929 the \SpecialChar TeX
36931 If \SpecialChar LyX
36932 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36933 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36935 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36936 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36937 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36940 \begin_layout Subsection
36945 \begin_layout Standard
36946 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36947 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36950 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36957 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36959 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36961 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36962 's main window, then only this selection
36963 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36964 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36965 the source view window.
36970 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36971 ; but note that if you have
36972 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36974 not just the one which is open at the time.
36977 \begin_layout Section
36978 Advanced Find and Replace
36979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36981 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36986 \begin_inset Index idx
36989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36996 \begin_inset Index idx
36999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37008 \begin_layout Subsection
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37013 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37014 allows for searching of complex,
37015 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37017 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37018 The key-features are:
37021 \begin_layout Itemize
37022 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37023 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37024 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37028 \begin_layout Itemize
37029 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37030 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37031 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37032 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37035 \begin_layout Itemize
37036 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37037 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37038 outside of mathematics environments
37041 \begin_layout Itemize
37042 Search may be widened to a specific
37047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37054 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37055 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37062 \begin_layout Itemize
37063 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37064 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37072 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37075 \begin_layout Subsection
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37095 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37098 ) or the toolbar button
37101 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37107 Advanced Find and Replace
37112 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37116 \begin_layout Standard
37122 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37131 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37134 arg "paragraph-break"
37138 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37139 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37143 arg "paragraph-break"
37146 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37150 searches backwards.
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37157 \begin_inset space ~
37162 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37176 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37180 Searching for mathematics
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 Mathematical formulas, such as
37185 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37188 or something more complex like
37189 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37192 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37197 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37198 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37199 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37200 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37212 This is done by switching to the
37216 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37221 This way, entering in the
37228 \begin_layout Itemize
37229 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37230 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37233 \begin_layout Itemize
37234 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37235 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37238 \begin_layout Itemize
37239 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37240 of it only within section headings.
37241 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37242 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37246 \begin_layout Itemize
37247 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37248 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37255 \begin_layout Standard
37256 The entries made in the
37260 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37269 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37273 button or alternatively press
37276 arg "paragraph-break"
37283 while the cursor is in the
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37294 \begin_layout Standard
37295 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37297 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37301 \begin_layout Itemize
37302 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37303 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37311 with its typewriter version
37312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37326 \begin_layout Itemize
37327 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37333 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37345 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37352 (you may want to enable the
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37368 options and disable the
37376 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37384 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37385 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37389 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37392 , or occurrences of
37393 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37397 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37403 \begin_layout Subsection
37407 \begin_layout Standard
37408 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37415 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37417 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37427 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37433 This is done with the context menu
37435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37436 Insert Regular Expression
37438 while the cursor is in the
37443 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37444 expression matching rules
37448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37449 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37459 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37460 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37466 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37467 same text in the document.
37468 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37469 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37472 \begin_layout Enumerate
37473 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37478 editor the fraction
37479 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37483 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37486 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37487 fractions with the given denominator.
37490 \begin_layout Enumerate
37491 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37503 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37508 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37509 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37510 Also, by inserting a
37511 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37514 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37515 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37518 \begin_layout Standard
37519 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37520 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37521 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37524 , and referring back to them through
37525 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37529 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37533 For example, try searching with the regexp
37534 \begin_inset Newline newline
37537 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37540 \begin_inset Newline newline
37543 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37546 \begin_layout Standard
37547 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37559 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37560 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37561 sub-expressions is absolute.
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37567 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37570 always refers to the first occurrence of
37571 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37574 in all entered regexps.
37582 \begin_layout Section
37584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37586 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37591 \begin_inset Index idx
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37605 has a built-in spell checker.
37608 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37615 key or the toolbar button
37618 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37621 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37622 beginning of the currently selected text.
37623 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37624 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37625 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37626 scrolled so that it is visible.
37627 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37628 n, if any could be found.
37629 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37633 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37634 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37637 \begin_layout Standard
37638 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37645 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37646 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37648 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37649 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37652 \begin_inset space ~
37660 arg "dialog-show character"
37663 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37665 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37670 can be downloaded from here:
37671 \begin_inset Newline newline
37675 \begin_inset Flex URL
37678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37680 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37686 \begin_inset Newline newline
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37693 files for each language.
37694 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37698 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37699 's installation subfolder
37707 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37709 \begin_inset Newline newline
37712 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37713 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37714 but in most cases these are
37730 is the language code.
37733 \begin_layout Subsection
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37740 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37741 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37746 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37749 you can set the following things:
37752 \begin_layout Description
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37757 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37758 should use for spell checking.
37759 Depending on your platform,
37769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37770 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37771 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37789 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37792 \begin_layout Description
37794 \begin_inset space ~
37797 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37798 will always use the given language
37799 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37802 \begin_layout Description
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37807 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37813 \begin_inset space \space{}
37817 This should normally not be needed.
37820 \begin_layout Description
37822 \begin_inset space ~
37826 \begin_inset space ~
37829 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37841 \begin_layout Description
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37846 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37847 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37848 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37849 appear in a context menu.
37850 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37854 \begin_layout Description
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37867 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37871 \begin_layout Section
37873 \begin_inset Index idx
37876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37885 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37894 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37895 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37905 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37907 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37917 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37919 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37920 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37921 which are available for many languages.
37924 \begin_layout Standard
37925 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37926 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37930 \begin_layout Subsection
37931 Setting up the thesaurus
37934 \begin_layout Standard
37943 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37947 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37952 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37966 For instance, the US English files are named:
37969 \begin_layout Itemize
37973 \begin_layout Itemize
37977 \begin_layout Standard
37986 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37987 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37990 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37992 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37999 ) to the path where they are installed.
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38004 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38005 ies, typical locations are
38011 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38015 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38019 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38022 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38028 LibreOffice-<Version>
38035 On the Mac, the default location is
38037 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38038 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38039 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38040 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38041 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38042 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38050 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38051 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38052 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38056 \begin_layout Standard
38057 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38058 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38060 \begin_inset Newline newline
38064 \begin_inset Flex URL
38067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38079 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38081 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38082 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38083 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38090 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38092 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38093 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38097 \begin_layout Standard
38098 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38100 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38103 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38109 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38112 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38113 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38121 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38122 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38123 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38125 \begin_inset space ~
38130 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38133 \begin_layout Subsection
38134 Using the thesaurus
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38138 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38140 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38143 or the toolbar button
38146 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38149 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38151 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38153 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38154 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38155 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38164 ), related terms (such as
38167 \begin_inset space ~
38176 ), compounds (such as
38179 \begin_inset space ~
38188 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38197 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38202 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38208 the dictionary, such as the above
38212 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38217 \begin_inset space \space{}
38220 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38221 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38222 For example, looking up the word form
38226 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38231 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38236 \begin_inset space \space{}
38247 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38248 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38249 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38252 \begin_layout Section
38254 \begin_inset Index idx
38257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38264 \begin_inset Index idx
38267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 Document ! Change Tracking
38274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38276 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38283 \begin_layout Standard
38284 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38285 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38286 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38287 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38291 \begin_inset space ~
38294 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38304 \begin_layout Standard
38305 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38319 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38320 You can change the color in
38322 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38323 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38334 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38340 \begin_inset Index idx
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38344 Color ! Change tracking
38349 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38350 's status bar when the
38351 cursor is in changed text.
38352 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38355 arg "changes-merge"
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38362 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38364 \begin_inset Index idx
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38376 \begin_layout Standard
38377 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38383 \begin_layout Standard
38384 \begin_inset Graphics
38385 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38400 \begin_layout Standard
38401 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38404 \begin_layout Standard
38405 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38411 \begin_layout Standard
38412 \begin_inset Tabular
38413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38414 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38415 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38416 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38426 arg "changes-track"
38434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38442 \begin_inset space ~
38445 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38447 \begin_inset space ~
38456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 arg "changes-output"
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38481 \begin_inset space ~
38484 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38486 \begin_inset space ~
38490 \begin_inset space ~
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38524 Jumps to the next change
38530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38539 arg "change-accept"
38547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38555 \begin_inset space ~
38558 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38560 \begin_inset space ~
38569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38578 arg "change-reject"
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38594 \begin_inset space ~
38597 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38599 \begin_inset space ~
38608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 arg "changes-merge"
38625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38633 \begin_inset space ~
38636 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 arg "all-changes-accept"
38664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38672 \begin_inset space ~
38675 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38699 arg "all-changes-reject"
38707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38718 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38757 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38759 \begin_inset space ~
38768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38791 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 \begin_inset space ~
38809 \begin_layout Standard
38810 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38816 \begin_layout Standard
38817 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38837 \begin_layout Standard
38838 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38839 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38840 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38841 the next change after the current cursor position.
38842 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38843 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38844 step to the next change.
38845 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38848 \begin_layout Standard
38849 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38850 to describe a change.
38853 \begin_layout Standard
38855 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38856 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38862 \begin_inset Index idx
38865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38873 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38875 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38882 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38888 \begin_layout Section
38889 Comparison of Documents
38890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38892 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38897 \begin_inset Index idx
38900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38901 Comparison of documents
38909 \begin_layout Standard
38910 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38913 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38917 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38918 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38920 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38922 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38947 \begin_inset space ~
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38968 enables the change tracking option
38971 \begin_inset space ~
38975 \begin_inset space ~
38979 \begin_inset space ~
38984 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38987 \begin_layout Section
38988 International Support
38989 \begin_inset Index idx
38992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38993 International support
39001 \begin_layout Standard
39002 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39003 with any language you want.
39004 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39005 up \SpecialChar LyX
39007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39009 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39017 \begin_layout Standard
39018 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39019 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39020 \begin_inset space ~
39024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39026 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39033 \begin_layout Subsection
39035 \begin_inset Index idx
39038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 \begin_inset Index idx
39048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 Document ! Settings
39055 \begin_inset Index idx
39058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 Document ! Language
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39074 dialog lets you set
39076 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39081 \begin_layout Standard
39086 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39096 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39097 For details about the different encoding options see section
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39104 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39111 \begin_layout Subsection
39112 Keyboard mapping configuration
39113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39115 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39122 \begin_layout Standard
39123 If you have for example a U.
39124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39127 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39128 can use an alternate keymap.
39129 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39134 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39135 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39136 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39139 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39140 \begin_inset space ~
39144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39146 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39151 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39152 which one you want to use.
39155 \begin_layout Standard
39156 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39157 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39158 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39162 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39163 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39164 one to support the characters you want.
39165 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39172 \begin_layout Chapter
39175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39177 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39184 \begin_layout Standard
39185 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39186 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39187 topic inside the user's guide.
39190 \begin_layout Section
39192 \begin_inset Index idx
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39204 \begin_layout Standard
39209 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39212 \begin_layout Subsection
39216 \begin_layout Standard
39217 Creates a new document.
39220 \begin_layout Subsection
39224 \begin_layout Standard
39225 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39226 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39227 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39229 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39230 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39236 \begin_layout Subsection
39240 \begin_layout Standard
39244 \begin_layout Subsection
39248 \begin_layout Standard
39249 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39250 Click there on a file to open it.
39253 \begin_layout Subsection
39255 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39259 \begin_layout Standard
39261 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39262 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39266 \begin_layout Subsection
39270 \begin_layout Standard
39271 Closes the current document.
39274 \begin_layout Subsection
39278 \begin_layout Standard
39279 Closes all opened documents.
39282 \begin_layout Subsection
39286 \begin_layout Standard
39287 Saves the actual document.
39290 \begin_layout Subsection
39294 \begin_layout Standard
39295 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39296 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39300 \begin_layout Subsection
39302 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39308 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39309 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39315 \begin_layout Subsection
39319 \begin_layout Standard
39320 Saves all opened documents.
39323 \begin_layout Subsection
39327 \begin_layout Standard
39328 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39331 \begin_layout Subsection
39335 \begin_layout Standard
39336 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39337 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39338 It is described in the section
39340 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39345 Additional Features
39350 \begin_layout Subsection
39354 \begin_layout Standard
39355 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39356 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39358 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39359 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39364 When using the menu entry
39367 \begin_inset space ~
39372 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39380 \begin_inset space ~
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39389 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39390 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39393 \begin_layout Subsection
39395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39397 name "subsec:Export"
39404 \begin_layout Standard
39405 You can export your document to various file formats.
39406 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39408 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39409 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39410 during its configuration.
39413 \begin_layout Standard
39414 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39416 \begin_inset space ~
39420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39422 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39429 \begin_layout Description
39435 \begin_inset space ~
39438 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39440 \begin_inset space ~
39443 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39444 \begin_inset Newline newline
39447 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39448 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39452 \begin_layout Description
39453 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39459 \begin_layout Description
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39464 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39470 \begin_layout Description
39471 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39472 's native DVI-format.
39473 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39474 files paths or file names in your document.
39476 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39483 \begin_layout Description
39484 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39485 in files paths or file names
39488 \begin_layout Description
39490 \begin_inset space ~
39497 ) DVI-format using the program
39499 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39502 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39514 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39522 \begin_layout Description
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39527 (cropped) the same as
39531 but with cropped page margins.
39534 \begin_layout Description
39536 \begin_inset space ~
39539 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39543 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39548 \begin_layout Description
39552 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39560 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39568 \begin_layout Description
39570 \begin_inset space ~
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39577 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39581 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39589 \begin_layout Description
39593 \begin_inset space ~
39602 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39603 source that is compilable with the program
39605 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39609 \begin_layout Description
39613 \begin_inset space ~
39618 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39619 source, additionally all images used in the document
39620 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39624 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39627 \begin_layout Description
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39636 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39637 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39638 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39646 \begin_layout Description
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39659 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39660 source that is compilable with the program
39666 \begin_layout Description
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39679 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39680 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39686 \begin_layout Description
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39691 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39692 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39698 \begin_inset space \space{}
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39722 represent the version number)
39725 \begin_layout Description
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39734 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39735 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39736 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39740 \begin_layout Description
39741 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39742 's internal XHTML engine
39745 \begin_layout Description
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39755 \begin_inset space ~
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39762 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39767 For the conversion the program
39776 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39779 \begin_layout Description
39780 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39785 \begin_layout Description
39787 \begin_inset space ~
39790 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39792 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39795 For the conversion the program
39804 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39807 \begin_layout Description
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39812 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39813 For the conversion the program
39822 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39825 \begin_layout Description
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39830 (cropped) the same as
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39838 but with cropped page margins
39841 \begin_layout Description
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39850 PDF-format using the program
39854 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39857 \begin_layout Description
39861 \begin_inset space ~
39865 \begin_inset space ~
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39878 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39883 \begin_inset space \space{}
39886 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39890 \begin_layout Description
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39899 PDF-format using the program
39901 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39904 , produces PDF-files directly
39907 \begin_layout Description
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39916 PDF-format using the program
39920 , produces PDF-files directly
39923 \begin_layout Description
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39932 PDF-format using the program
39936 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39939 \begin_layout Description
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39948 PDF-format using the program
39953 , produces PDF-files directly
39956 \begin_layout Description
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39968 \begin_layout Description
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39981 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39982 and then exported as text using the program
39987 \begin_layout Description
39992 PostScript format using the program
40000 options see section
40001 \begin_inset space ~
40005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40007 reference "subsec:General-output"
40014 \begin_layout Description
40015 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40016 source and also code in the statistical programming
40030 it is possible to use
40034 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40038 \begin_layout Standard
40039 If one of the menu entries
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40055 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40057 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40065 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40070 \begin_inset Index idx
40073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40074 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40083 \begin_layout Subsection
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40088 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40089 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40098 reference "sec:Paths"
40103 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40112 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40113 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40114 's preferences as described in section
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40121 reference "subsec:Converters"
40128 \begin_layout Subsection
40129 New and Close Window
40132 \begin_layout Standard
40133 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40137 \begin_layout Subsection
40141 \begin_layout Standard
40142 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40145 \begin_layout Section
40147 \begin_inset Index idx
40150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40159 \begin_layout Subsection
40163 \begin_layout Standard
40164 Described in section
40165 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40171 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40178 \begin_layout Subsection
40179 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 Described in section
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40197 \begin_layout Subsection
40201 \begin_layout Standard
40202 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40203 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40206 \begin_layout Subsection
40210 \begin_layout Standard
40211 Selects the whole document.
40214 \begin_layout Subsection
40215 Find & Replace (Quick)
40218 \begin_layout Standard
40219 Described in section
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40226 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40233 \begin_layout Subsection
40234 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40237 \begin_layout Standard
40238 Described in section
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40245 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40252 \begin_layout Subsection
40253 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40257 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40261 \begin_layout Subsection
40263 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40269 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40270 Described in section
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40277 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40286 \begin_layout Subsection
40288 \begin_inset Index idx
40291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40292 Paragraph ! Settings
40300 \begin_layout Standard
40301 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40302 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40308 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40315 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40317 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40327 \begin_layout Subsection
40329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40333 \begin_layout Standard
40335 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40336 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40341 \begin_layout Enumerate
40343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40344 Customize text properties by means of the
40350 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40353 ; this is described in section
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40360 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40367 \begin_layout Enumerate
40369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40370 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40372 Apply last settings
40375 \begin_layout Enumerate
40377 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40378 Change the casing of selected text (
40393 \begin_layout Subsection
40395 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40401 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40402 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40403 text styles (in the case of this document:
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40431 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40440 \begin_layout Subsection
40441 Table and Rows & Columns
40444 \begin_layout Standard
40445 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40446 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40447 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40450 \begin_layout Subsection
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40455 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40456 It will dissolve this inset.
40457 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40461 \begin_layout Subsection
40465 \begin_layout Standard
40466 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40467 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40470 \begin_layout Subsection
40471 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40474 \begin_layout Standard
40475 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40477 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40484 reference "sec:Nesting"
40489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40491 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40498 \begin_layout Section
40500 \begin_inset Index idx
40503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40512 \begin_layout Standard
40513 At the bottom of the
40517 menu the opened documents are listed.
40520 \begin_layout Subsection
40521 Open/Close all Insets
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40528 \begin_layout Subsection
40529 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40532 \begin_layout Standard
40533 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40536 \begin_layout Standard
40537 Math macros are described in the
40544 \begin_layout Subsection
40548 \begin_layout Standard
40549 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40550 \begin_inset space ~
40554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40556 reference "sec:Navigating"
40561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40563 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40570 \begin_layout Subsection
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40575 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40583 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40590 \begin_layout Subsection
40594 \begin_layout Standard
40595 Opens a window showing console messages.
40596 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40601 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40602 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40603 is processing the document.
40606 \begin_layout Subsection
40608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40610 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40615 \begin_inset Index idx
40618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40627 \begin_layout Standard
40628 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40630 All toolbars and the
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40638 can be turned on and off.
40643 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40672 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40676 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40683 \begin_layout Standard
40688 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40692 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40693 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40694 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40695 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40696 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40701 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40708 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40715 \begin_layout Subsection
40719 \begin_layout Standard
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40727 \begin_inset space ~
40731 \begin_inset space ~
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40748 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40749 's main window vertically while
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40764 \begin_inset space ~
40768 \begin_inset space ~
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40777 will split it horizontally.
40778 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40779 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40780 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40781 three or more documents at the same time.
40782 To close a split view, use the menu
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40789 \begin_inset space ~
40797 \begin_layout Subsection
40801 \begin_layout Standard
40802 Closes a split view.
40805 \begin_layout Subsection
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40810 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40811 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40812 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40813 's main window fullscreen.
40814 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40815 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40818 \begin_layout Section
40820 \begin_inset Index idx
40823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40832 \begin_layout Subsection
40836 \begin_layout Standard
40837 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40844 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40855 \begin_layout Subsection
40857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40859 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40867 Here you can insert the following characters:
40870 \begin_layout Description
40875 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40878 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40879 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40880 -packages you have installed.
40881 You can get a complete display by checking
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset Newline newline
40894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 Not all characters will be visible in the
40906 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40907 dialog (see section
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40914 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40918 ) can display every character.
40926 \begin_layout Description
40927 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40931 \begin_layout Description
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40940 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40947 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40954 \begin_layout Description
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40963 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40969 \begin_layout Description
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40974 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40978 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40984 \begin_layout Description
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40989 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40993 \begin_layout Description
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40998 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41009 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41015 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41020 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41026 \begin_inset space \space{}
41029 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41030 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41039 To insert a fraction use the command
41044 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41048 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41057 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41064 \begin_layout Description
41066 \begin_inset space ~
41069 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41073 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset Index idx
41082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41089 \begin_inset Index idx
41092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41093 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41098 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41099 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41101 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41107 \begin_inset Index idx
41110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41118 \begin_inset Newline newline
41121 More information about this feature can be found in the
41127 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41133 \begin_layout Description
41134 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41136 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41137 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41141 \begin_layout Subsection
41145 \begin_layout Standard
41146 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41149 \begin_layout Description
41150 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41151 \begin_inset script superscript
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41162 \begin_layout Description
41163 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41164 \begin_inset script subscript
41166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41175 \begin_layout Description
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41180 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41187 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41194 \begin_layout Description
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41199 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41206 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41213 \begin_layout Description
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41225 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41232 \begin_layout Description
41234 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41239 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41245 \begin_inset space \space{}
41248 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41249 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41258 To insert a fraction use the command
41263 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41267 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41276 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41297 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41304 \begin_layout Description
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41309 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41316 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41323 \begin_layout Description
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41328 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41335 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41342 \begin_layout Description
41343 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41350 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41357 \begin_layout Description
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41362 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41369 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41376 \begin_layout Description
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41381 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41388 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41404 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41413 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41420 for a usage example.
41423 \begin_layout Description
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41432 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41433 \begin_inset space ~
41437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41439 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41446 \begin_layout Description
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41451 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41452 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41455 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41456 \begin_inset space ~
41460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41462 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41469 \begin_layout Description
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41474 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41481 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41488 \begin_layout Description
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41493 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41494 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41502 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41509 \begin_layout Description
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41514 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41528 \begin_layout Description
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41537 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41544 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41551 \begin_layout Subsection
41553 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41557 \begin_layout Standard
41559 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41560 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41561 The submenu allows you to insert
41564 \begin_layout Description
41566 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41571 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41574 \begin_layout Description
41576 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41585 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41589 \begin_layout Description
41591 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41593 \begin_inset space ~
41596 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41599 \begin_layout Description
41601 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41603 \begin_inset space ~
41606 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41609 \begin_layout Description
41611 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41620 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41624 \begin_layout Description
41626 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41631 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41634 \begin_layout Description
41636 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41649 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41652 \begin_layout Description
41654 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41659 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41662 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41668 \begin_layout Description
41670 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41675 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41677 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41678 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41684 \begin_layout Description
41686 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41687 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41688 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41689 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41692 \begin_layout Subsection
41695 List/Contents/References
41698 \begin_layout Standard
41699 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41724 are described in section
41725 \begin_inset space ~
41729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41731 reference "sec:toc"
41740 is described in section
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41747 reference "sec:Index"
41755 is described in section
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41762 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41768 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41771 is described in section
41772 \begin_inset space ~
41776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41778 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41785 \begin_layout Subsection
41789 \begin_layout Standard
41790 To insert floats, as described in section
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41797 reference "sec:Floats"
41801 and in detail the chapter
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41816 \begin_layout Subsection
41820 \begin_layout Standard
41821 To insert notes, described in section
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41828 reference "sec:Notes"
41835 \begin_layout Subsection
41839 \begin_layout Standard
41840 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41842 Branches are described in section
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41849 reference "sec:Branches"
41856 \begin_layout Subsection
41860 \begin_layout Standard
41861 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41862 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41864 An example is the document class
41865 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41875 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41884 with three custom insets.
41887 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41891 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41897 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41900 \begin_layout Subsection
41902 \begin_inset Index idx
41905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41914 \begin_layout Standard
41915 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41917 For more information see chapter
41919 External Document Parts
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_layout Subsection
41930 \begin_inset Index idx
41933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41942 \begin_layout Standard
41943 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41944 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41951 \begin_inset space ~
41959 \begin_layout Subsection
41963 \begin_layout Standard
41968 dialog as described in section
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41975 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41982 \begin_layout Subsection
41986 \begin_layout Standard
41991 as described in section
41992 \begin_inset space ~
41996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41998 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42005 \begin_layout Subsection
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42014 as described in section
42015 \begin_inset space ~
42019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42021 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42028 \begin_layout Subsection
42030 \begin_inset Index idx
42033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42040 \begin_inset Index idx
42043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42044 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42052 \begin_layout Standard
42053 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42054 Floats are described in section
42055 \begin_inset space ~
42059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42061 reference "sec:Floats"
42065 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42068 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42084 \begin_layout Subsection
42088 \begin_layout Standard
42089 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42096 reference "sec:Index"
42103 \begin_layout Subsection
42107 \begin_layout Standard
42108 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42115 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42122 \begin_layout Subsection
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42127 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42128 Tables are described in section
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42135 reference "sec:Tables"
42139 and in detail in the chapter
42146 \begin_inset space ~
42154 \begin_layout Subsection
42158 \begin_layout Standard
42164 Graphics are described in section
42165 \begin_inset space ~
42169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42171 reference "sec:Graphics"
42178 \begin_layout Subsection
42182 \begin_layout Standard
42183 Inserts a URL as described in section
42184 \begin_inset space ~
42188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42190 reference "subsec:URLs"
42197 \begin_layout Subsection
42201 \begin_layout Standard
42202 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42203 \begin_inset space ~
42207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42209 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42216 \begin_layout Subsection
42220 \begin_layout Standard
42221 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42222 \begin_inset space ~
42226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42228 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42235 \begin_layout Subsection
42239 \begin_layout Standard
42240 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42241 \begin_inset space ~
42245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42247 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42254 \begin_layout Subsection
42257 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42261 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42262 environments of the same type.
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42270 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42274 for an explanation.
42277 \begin_layout Subsection
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42282 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42283 title or caption of a float.
42284 Inserts a short title as described in section
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42291 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42298 \begin_layout Subsection
42303 \begin_layout Standard
42304 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42305 Code box as described in section
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42312 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42319 \begin_layout Subsection
42321 \begin_inset Index idx
42324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 \begin_layout Standard
42334 Inserts a program listings box.
42335 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42337 Program Code Listings
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42350 \begin_layout Subsection
42352 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42356 \begin_layout Standard
42358 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42359 Inserts the actual date.
42360 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42367 \begin_layout Subsection
42371 \begin_layout Standard
42372 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42379 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42386 \begin_layout Section
42388 \begin_inset Index idx
42391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42400 \begin_layout Standard
42401 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42405 of the current document.
42406 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42409 \begin_layout Subsection
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42415 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42416 to jump, for example, between section
42417 \begin_inset space ~
42421 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42422 \begin_inset space ~
42425 2.5 and use the submenu
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42439 \begin_inset space ~
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42455 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42459 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42465 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42468 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42471 \begin_layout Standard
42472 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42481 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42489 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42492 \begin_layout Subsection
42493 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42497 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42501 \begin_layout Subsection
42505 \begin_layout Standard
42506 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42507 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42508 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42524 \begin_layout Subsection
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42529 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42532 The \SpecialChar LyX
42533 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42548 manual for a detailed description.
42551 \begin_layout Section
42553 \begin_inset Index idx
42556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42565 \begin_layout Subsection
42569 \begin_layout Standard
42570 Change Tracking is described in section
42571 \begin_inset space ~
42575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42577 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42584 \begin_layout Subsection
42592 \begin_layout Standard
42593 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42594 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42595 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42597 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42598 to the clipboard or update the view.
42599 \begin_inset Newline newline
42602 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42606 \begin_layout Standard
42609 Open Containing Directory
42611 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42612 's temporary folder for the document.
42613 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42614 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42615 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42616 For example some journals require to send the
42620 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42624 \begin_layout Subsection
42625 Start Appendix Here
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42629 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42630 as described in section
42631 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42637 reference "sec:Appendices"
42644 \begin_layout Subsection
42646 \begin_inset space ~
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42654 default output format for the document (menu
42656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42657 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42658 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42660 \begin_inset space ~
42664 \begin_inset space ~
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42676 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42680 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42683 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42684 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42686 \begin_inset space ~
42689 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42694 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42712 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42716 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42717 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42719 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42720 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42722 \begin_inset space ~
42725 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42730 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42734 \begin_inset space ~
42738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42740 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42745 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42746 when it is first configured.
42747 The default output format is
42750 \begin_inset space ~
42758 \begin_layout Subsection
42759 View (Other Formats)
42762 \begin_layout Standard
42763 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42764 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42765 actual document with an external program.
42766 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42767 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42768 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42770 All possible formats are listed in section
42771 \begin_inset space ~
42775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42777 reference "subsec:Export"
42782 You should at least see the menu entry
42787 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42789 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42791 \begin_inset space ~
42795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42797 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42802 \begin_inset Index idx
42805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42816 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42817 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42820 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42825 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42827 \begin_inset space ~
42830 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42834 \begin_inset space ~
42838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42840 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42845 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42846 when it is first configured.
42849 \begin_layout Subsection
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42858 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42859 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42862 \begin_layout Subsection
42863 Update (Other Formats)
42866 \begin_layout Standard
42867 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42868 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42871 \begin_layout Subsection
42872 View Master Document
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42876 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42897 manual for more information on this topic).
42898 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42899 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42907 \begin_inset space ~
42912 generates the output of the whole book, while
42916 will just output the chapter alone.
42919 \begin_layout Standard
42920 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42921 in the document settings (menu
42923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42924 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42925 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42927 \begin_inset space ~
42931 \begin_inset space ~
42937 \begin_inset space ~
42941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42943 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42947 ) or in the preferences (menu
42949 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42950 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42952 \begin_inset space ~
42955 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42957 \begin_inset space ~
42960 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42978 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42985 \begin_layout Subsection
42986 Update Master Document
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42990 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43006 \begin_inset space ~
43011 manual for more information on this topic).
43012 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43013 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43016 \begin_layout Standard
43017 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43018 in the document settings (menu
43020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43021 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43022 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43024 \begin_inset space ~
43028 \begin_inset space ~
43034 \begin_inset space ~
43038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43040 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43044 ) or in the preferences (menu
43046 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43047 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43049 \begin_inset space ~
43052 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43054 \begin_inset space ~
43057 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43063 \begin_inset space ~
43069 \begin_inset space ~
43073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43075 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43082 \begin_layout Subsection
43084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43086 name "subsec:Compressed"
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43094 Un/compresses the current document.
43095 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43096 compression (see the
43098 Additional Features
43100 manual for details).
43103 \begin_layout Subsection
43107 \begin_layout Standard
43108 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43111 \begin_layout Subsection
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 The document settings are described in appendix
43117 \begin_inset space ~
43121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43123 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43130 \begin_layout Section
43132 \begin_inset Index idx
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43144 \begin_layout Subsection
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43149 Spell checking is explained in section
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43156 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43163 \begin_layout Subsection
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43168 The thesaurus is described in section
43169 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43175 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43182 \begin_layout Subsection
43184 \begin_inset Index idx
43187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43194 \begin_inset Index idx
43197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43206 \begin_layout Standard
43207 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43208 the highlighted document part.
43211 \begin_layout Subsection
43217 \begin_inset Index idx
43220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43221 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43230 \begin_layout Standard
43231 Generates with the help of the program
43233 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43236 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43237 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43238 This feature is not available on Windows.
43241 \begin_layout Subsection
43247 \begin_inset Index idx
43250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43260 \begin_layout Standard
43261 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43271 to see the full filename paths.
43274 \begin_layout Subsection
43276 \begin_inset Index idx
43279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43288 \begin_layout Standard
43289 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43290 files as described in section
43291 \begin_inset space ~
43295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43297 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43304 \begin_layout Subsection
43306 \begin_inset Index idx
43309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43340 \begin_inset Index idx
43343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43344 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43353 \begin_layout Standard
43354 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43355 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43356 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43357 -packages and programs it needs; see
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43365 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43372 \begin_layout Subsection
43376 \begin_layout Standard
43381 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43382 \begin_inset space ~
43386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43388 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43395 \begin_layout Section
43397 \begin_inset Index idx
43400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43410 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43411 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43413 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43417 \begin_layout Standard
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43426 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43427 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43428 packages and classes found
43429 by \SpecialChar LyX
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43437 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43453 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43458 \begin_layout Section
43460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43462 name "sec:Toolbars"
43469 \begin_layout Standard
43470 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43471 \begin_inset space ~
43475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43477 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43484 \begin_layout Standard
43485 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43486 This is described in the
43488 Additional Features
43493 \begin_layout Subsection
43495 \begin_inset Index idx
43498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43508 \begin_inset Graphics
43509 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43517 \begin_layout Standard
43518 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43524 \begin_layout Standard
43525 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43542 \begin_inset Note Note
43545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43546 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43551 manual for more information.
43559 \begin_layout Standard
43560 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43566 \begin_layout Standard
43567 \begin_inset Tabular
43568 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43569 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43577 \begin_inset Graphics
43578 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 pull-down box for the environments
43605 \begin_layout Standard
43606 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43612 \begin_layout Standard
43614 \begin_inset Tabular
43615 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43616 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43617 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43618 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43642 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43672 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43718 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43732 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 arg "spelling-continuously"
43756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43760 Spellcheck continuously
43766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43789 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43909 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43911 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43916 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43948 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43974 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43988 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44016 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44030 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44031 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44059 Emphasize text, function of the
44060 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44065 \begin_inset space ~
44068 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44070 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44076 arg "dialog-show character"
44087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44108 Set text to noun style, function of the
44109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44112 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44117 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44125 arg "dialog-show character"
44136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44145 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44158 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44161 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44174 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44179 arg "textstyle-apply"
44189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44194 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44195 Format text using the current settings in the
44197 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44202 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44237 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44239 \begin_inset space ~
44248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44257 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44285 arg "tabular-insert"
44293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44315 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44359 Toggle outline window on/off,
44361 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44389 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44404 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44416 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44429 \begin_layout Subsection
44431 \begin_inset Index idx
44434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44443 \begin_layout Standard
44444 \begin_inset Graphics
44445 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44453 \begin_layout Standard
44454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44460 \begin_layout Standard
44461 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44465 \begin_layout Standard
44466 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44472 \begin_layout Standard
44473 \begin_inset Tabular
44474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44475 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44476 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44477 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44514 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44541 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 arg "layout-toggle List"
44576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44622 arg "depth-increment"
44630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44642 \begin_inset space ~
44651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44660 arg "depth-decrement"
44668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44676 \begin_inset space ~
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 arg "float-insert figure"
44706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44713 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 arg "float-insert table"
44737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44744 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44820 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44866 \begin_inset space ~
44875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44884 arg "nomencl-insert"
44892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44918 arg "footnote-insert"
44926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44948 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44997 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45017 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45093 \begin_inset space ~
45102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45111 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45126 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45142 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45157 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45177 arg "dialog-show character"
45185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45191 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45209 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45214 arg "textstyle-apply"
45222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45227 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45228 Format text using the recent settings in the
45231 arg "dialog-show character"
45240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45249 arg "layout-paragraph"
45257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45265 \begin_inset space ~
45274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45297 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45311 \begin_layout Subsection
45312 View/Update Toolbar
45313 \begin_inset Index idx
45316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 Toolbar ! View / Update
45325 \begin_layout Standard
45326 \begin_inset Graphics
45327 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45334 \begin_layout Standard
45335 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45341 \begin_layout Standard
45342 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45353 \begin_layout Standard
45354 \begin_inset Tabular
45355 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45356 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45357 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45358 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45398 arg "buffer-update"
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 arg "master-buffer-view"
45436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 arg "master-buffer-update"
45470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45500 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45515 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45516 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45517 Synchronize with Output
45523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45551 View (Other Formats)
45557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45564 arg "update-others"
45568 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45583 Update (Other Formats)
45596 \begin_layout Standard
45598 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45599 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45605 \begin_layout Subsection
45609 \begin_layout Standard
45610 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45611 \begin_inset space ~
45615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45617 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45621 , the table toolbar
45622 \begin_inset Index idx
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45639 manual and the math macro toolbar
45640 \begin_inset Index idx
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45656 \begin_layout Chapter
45657 The Document Settings
45658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45660 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45665 \begin_inset Index idx
45668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45669 Document ! Settings
45677 \begin_layout Standard
45681 \begin_inset space ~
45686 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45687 is called with the menu
45689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45693 You can save your document settings as default with the
45695 Save as Document Defaults
45697 button in any dialog.
45698 This will create a template named
45702 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45703 when you create a new document without
45707 \begin_layout Standard
45712 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45713 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45716 \begin_layout Standard
45717 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45718 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45719 to find the one you are looking for.
45720 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45721 the submenus of the dialog.
45723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45727 \begin_inset space \space{}
45731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45738 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45739 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45740 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45743 \begin_layout Section
45747 \begin_layout Standard
45748 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45750 Document classes are described in section
45751 \begin_inset space ~
45755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45757 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45769 \begin_inset space ~
45774 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45779 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45780 as a layout for a document class.
45781 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45783 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 Some classes use special class options by default.
45794 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45798 and you can decide to use them or not.
45799 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45800 recommended you leave them untouched.
45805 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45806 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45811 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45813 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45819 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45820 \begin_inset Newline newline
45825 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45828 \begin_inset Newline newline
45831 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45832 distribution, see section
45837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45839 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45852 \begin_layout Standard
45857 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45858 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45859 in the background if the child document
45860 is opened without its master.
45861 This way child documents are always compilable.
45862 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45869 \begin_inset space ~
45877 \begin_layout Standard
45878 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45889 \begin_inset Index idx
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45894 packages ! prettyref
45900 \begin_inset Index idx
45903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45905 packages ! refstyle
45910 for cross-references, see section
45911 \begin_inset space ~
45915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45917 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45924 \begin_layout Section
45928 \begin_layout Standard
45929 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45930 Please refer to the section
45933 \begin_inset space ~
45941 \begin_inset space ~
45946 manual for details.
45949 \begin_layout Section
45953 \begin_layout Standard
45954 Modules are explained in section
45955 \begin_inset space ~
45959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45961 reference "subsec:Modules"
45968 \begin_layout Section
45972 \begin_layout Standard
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45980 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45987 \begin_layout Section
45991 \begin_layout Standard
45992 The document font settings are described in section
45993 \begin_inset space ~
45997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45999 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46006 \begin_layout Section
46010 \begin_layout Standard
46011 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46023 \begin_inset space ~
46028 and whether it should be a
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46036 can also be specified here.
46039 \begin_layout Standard
46040 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46041 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46042 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46044 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46047 \begin_layout Standard
46050 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46053 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46054 justifies the text on screen.
46055 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46057 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46061 \begin_layout Standard
46063 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46072 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46077 \begin_layout Section
46081 \begin_layout Standard
46082 This dialog is described in sections
46083 \begin_inset space ~
46087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46089 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46096 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46103 \begin_layout Section
46107 \begin_layout Standard
46108 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46115 reference "subsec:Margins"
46122 \begin_layout Section
46124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46126 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46131 \begin_inset Index idx
46134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46135 Language ! Encoding
46143 \begin_layout Standard
46144 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46145 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46146 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46148 is always encoded in utf8).
46149 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46150 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46151 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46152 -command is not known for
46153 a particular character).
46154 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46158 \begin_layout Standard
46160 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46161 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46162 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46163 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46164 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46165 's default encoding).
46166 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46167 's Unicode support covers the
46168 characters of most scripts.
46169 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46170 using one of the traditional, or
46171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46178 , encodings is necessary.
46181 \begin_layout Standard
46183 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46185 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46188 Traditional (auto-selected)
46194 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46195 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46196 the given language(s).
46198 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46202 \begin_layout Standard
46204 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46205 If you use the option
46210 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46213 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46214 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46217 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46220 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46221 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46222 exactly one encoding.
46223 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46228 \begin_layout Standard
46230 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46231 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46237 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46238 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46242 \begin_layout Standard
46244 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46245 Finally, you can also select
46249 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46250 Note that this encoding is then used for
46255 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46256 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46260 \begin_layout Standard
46262 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46265 Do not load inputenc
46267 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46268 from automatically loading the
46275 \begin_inset Index idx
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46280 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46282 packages ! inputenc
46290 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46291 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46292 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46293 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46294 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46296 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46302 Traditional (auto-selected)
46309 \begin_layout Standard
46311 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46313 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46314 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46315 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46316 installation supports Unicode), choose
46317 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46318 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46319 is quite incomplete, so
46320 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46325 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46326 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46327 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46328 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46329 -commands is not used, because all
46330 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46331 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46332 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46333 , two new alternative engines
46334 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46336 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46338 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46341 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46357 \begin_inset space ~
46363 \begin_inset space ~
46367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46369 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46374 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46378 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46383 \begin_layout Standard
46387 \begin_inset space ~
46392 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46393 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46403 The possible settings are:
46406 \begin_layout Description
46407 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46409 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46410 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46414 \begin_inset space ~
46418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46420 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46427 \begin_layout Description
46428 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46429 format you will use.
46430 In many cases this will be
46435 \begin_inset Index idx
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46446 If the newer package
46451 \begin_inset Index idx
46454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 packages ! polyglossia
46461 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46462 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46463 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46465 this package will be used instead of
46472 \begin_layout Description
46474 \begin_inset space ~
46485 would be more appropriate.
46488 \begin_layout Description
46489 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46490 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46494 (for German texts), type in
46497 \begin_inset Newline newline
46502 usepackage{ngerman}
46505 \begin_layout Description
46506 None will not use a language package.
46507 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46510 \begin_layout Standard
46511 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46514 \begin_layout Description
46516 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46518 \begin_inset space ~
46522 \begin_inset space ~
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46533 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46539 \begin_inset Index idx
46542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46544 packages ! inputenc
46550 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46551 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46552 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46558 \begin_layout Description
46559 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46561 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46562 commands, which may result in a big
46563 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46564 -commands are needed.
46566 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46567 This is the same as the
46580 \begin_layout Description
46582 \begin_inset space ~
46586 \begin_inset space ~
46589 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46592 \begin_layout Description
46594 \begin_inset space ~
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46601 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46604 \begin_layout Description
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46609 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46612 \begin_layout Description
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46618 \begin_inset space ~
46621 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46622 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46625 \begin_layout Description
46627 \begin_inset space ~
46631 \begin_inset space ~
46634 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46638 \begin_layout Description
46640 \begin_inset space ~
46644 \begin_inset space ~
46647 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46648 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46651 \begin_layout Description
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46657 \begin_inset space ~
46661 \begin_inset space ~
46664 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46665 \begin_inset space ~
46671 \begin_layout Description
46673 \begin_inset space ~
46677 \begin_inset space ~
46681 \begin_inset space ~
46684 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46685 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46688 \begin_layout Description
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46694 \begin_inset space ~
46697 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46698 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46699 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46700 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46705 \begin_inset space ~
46711 \begin_layout Description
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46717 \begin_inset space ~
46720 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46721 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46722 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46724 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46725 \begin_inset space ~
46729 \begin_inset space ~
46735 \begin_layout Description
46737 \begin_inset space ~
46741 \begin_inset space ~
46744 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46747 \begin_layout Description
46749 \begin_inset space ~
46753 \begin_inset space ~
46756 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46759 \begin_layout Description
46761 \begin_inset space ~
46765 \begin_inset space ~
46768 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46771 \begin_layout Description
46773 \begin_inset space ~
46776 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46779 \begin_layout Description
46781 \begin_inset space ~
46784 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46787 \begin_layout Description
46789 \begin_inset space ~
46793 \begin_inset space ~
46796 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46799 \begin_layout Description
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46811 \begin_layout Description
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46817 \begin_inset space ~
46820 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46823 \begin_layout Description
46825 \begin_inset space ~
46829 \begin_inset space ~
46835 \begin_layout Description
46837 \begin_inset space ~
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46844 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46850 \begin_inset Index idx
46853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46860 , when using this, set the document language to
46865 \begin_layout Description
46867 \begin_inset space ~
46871 \begin_inset space ~
46874 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46879 , when using this, set the document language to
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46888 \begin_layout Description
46890 \begin_inset space ~
46894 \begin_inset space ~
46897 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46903 \begin_inset Index idx
46906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46908 packages ! japanese
46913 , when using this, set the document language to
46918 \begin_layout Description
46920 \begin_inset space ~
46924 \begin_inset space ~
46927 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46932 , when using this, set the document language to
46937 \begin_layout Description
46939 \begin_inset space ~
46943 \begin_inset space ~
46946 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46951 , when using this, set the document language to
46956 \begin_layout Description
46958 \begin_inset space ~
46961 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46964 \begin_layout Description
46966 \begin_inset space ~
46970 \begin_inset space ~
46974 \begin_inset space ~
46977 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46980 \begin_layout Description
46982 \begin_inset space ~
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46993 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46994 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46995 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46998 \begin_layout Description
47000 \begin_inset space ~
47004 \begin_inset space ~
47010 \begin_layout Description
47012 \begin_inset space ~
47016 \begin_inset space ~
47019 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47020 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47023 \begin_layout Description
47025 \begin_inset space ~
47029 \begin_inset space ~
47032 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47038 \begin_inset Index idx
47041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47049 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47051 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47052 with the default encoding (
47054 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47060 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47061 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47066 \begin_layout Description
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47076 \begin_inset space ~
47079 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47086 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47089 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47096 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47097 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47099 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47102 \begin_layout Description
47104 \begin_inset space ~
47108 \begin_inset space ~
47111 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47117 \begin_inset Index idx
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47128 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47131 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47133 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47134 This used to be more comprehensive than
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47142 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47147 \begin_layout Description
47149 \begin_inset space ~
47152 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47158 \begin_inset Index idx
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47163 packages ! inputenc
47170 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47171 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47173 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47174 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47175 with the default encoding (
47177 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47183 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47184 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47189 \begin_layout Description
47191 \begin_inset space ~
47195 \begin_inset space ~
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47202 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47203 \begin_inset space ~
47209 \begin_layout Description
47211 \begin_inset space ~
47215 \begin_inset space ~
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47222 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47223 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47224 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47228 \begin_layout Description
47230 \begin_inset space ~
47234 \begin_inset space ~
47238 \begin_inset space ~
47241 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47242 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47245 \begin_layout Section
47247 \begin_inset Index idx
47250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47257 \begin_inset Index idx
47260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47267 \begin_inset Index idx
47270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47271 Color ! Shaded boxes
47277 \begin_inset Index idx
47280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47281 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47289 \begin_layout Standard
47290 Here you can alter the font color for the
47294 (default: black), for
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47302 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47306 (default: white) and for
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47319 sets the color back to the default.
47322 \begin_layout Standard
47323 Clicking any button showing
47331 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47332 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47333 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47334 later more quickly.
47337 \begin_layout Standard
47338 Note, if you change the
47341 \begin_inset space ~
47346 font color and use the option
47349 \begin_inset space ~
47354 in the document settings under
47357 \begin_inset space ~
47362 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47369 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47376 \begin_layout Standard
47377 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47383 \begin_layout Standard
47387 \begin_inset space ~
47396 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47402 Code after a forced page break:
47405 \begin_layout Itemize
47406 For the page color:
47407 \begin_inset Newline newline
47414 pagecolor{color name}
47417 \begin_layout Itemize
47418 For the text color:
47419 \begin_inset Newline newline
47429 \begin_layout Standard
47430 You are restricted to one of
47466 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47479 \begin_inset Newline newline
47482 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47483 names to refer to them:
47486 \begin_layout Itemize
47492 \begin_inset Newline newline
47497 page_backgroundcolor
47500 \begin_layout Itemize
47504 \begin_inset space ~
47510 \begin_inset Newline newline
47518 \begin_layout Itemize
47522 \begin_inset space ~
47528 \begin_inset Newline newline
47536 \begin_layout Itemize
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47546 \begin_inset Newline newline
47554 \begin_layout Standard
47555 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47558 \begin_inset space ~
47566 \begin_inset space ~
47574 \begin_layout Section
47576 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47580 \begin_layout Standard
47582 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47583 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47590 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47598 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47599 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47602 \begin_layout Standard
47604 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47605 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47607 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47610 \begin_layout Section
47614 \begin_layout Standard
47615 Here you can adjust the
47619 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47623 as described in section
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47630 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47635 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47639 \begin_layout Standard
47641 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47642 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47644 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47645 of this package can be used as well.
47646 The most common one are:
47649 \begin_layout Description
47651 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47652 right Line numbers to the right margin
47655 \begin_layout Description
47657 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47658 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47662 \begin_layout Description
47664 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47665 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47668 \begin_layout Description
47670 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47671 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47674 \begin_layout Description
47676 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47678 \begin_inset space ~
47681 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47686 \begin_layout Section
47690 \begin_layout Standard
47691 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47697 \begin_inset Index idx
47700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47702 packages ! biblatex
47712 \begin_inset Index idx
47715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47727 \begin_inset Index idx
47730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47738 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47741 Sectioned bibliography
47743 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47749 \begin_inset Index idx
47752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47754 packages ! bibtopic
47764 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47765 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47769 for the generation of the bibliography.
47770 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47777 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47784 \begin_layout Section
47788 \begin_layout Standard
47789 Here you can define the
47793 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47801 reference "sec:Index"
47808 \begin_layout Section
47812 \begin_layout Standard
47813 The PDF properties are explained in section
47814 \begin_inset space ~
47818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47820 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47827 \begin_layout Section
47831 \begin_layout Standard
47832 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47833 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47839 \begin_inset Index idx
47842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47854 \begin_inset Index idx
47857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47869 \begin_inset Index idx
47872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47884 \begin_inset Index idx
47887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47899 \begin_inset Index idx
47902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47904 packages ! mathdots
47914 \begin_inset Index idx
47917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47919 packages ! mathtools
47929 \begin_inset Index idx
47932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47944 \begin_inset Index idx
47947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47949 packages ! stackrel
47959 \begin_inset Index idx
47962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47964 packages ! stmaryrd
47974 \begin_inset Index idx
47977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47979 packages ! undertilde
47984 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47987 \begin_layout Description
47988 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47989 -errors in formulas,
47990 ensure that you have this enabled.
47993 \begin_layout Description
47994 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47995 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47996 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48000 \begin_layout Description
48001 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48004 \begin_inset space ~
48016 \begin_layout Description
48017 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48020 \begin_inset space ~
48032 \begin_layout Description
48033 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48044 \begin_layout Description
48045 mathtools is used for the math commands
48081 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48088 \begin_layout Description
48089 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48091 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48100 \begin_layout Description
48101 stackrel is used for the math command
48118 \begin_layout Description
48119 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48122 \begin_layout Description
48123 undertilde is used for the math command
48131 Accents for one Character
48140 \begin_layout Section
48142 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48144 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48150 \begin_layout Standard
48152 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48153 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48156 \begin_layout Standard
48158 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48159 The float placement options
48160 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48163 are described in the section
48166 \begin_inset space ~
48170 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48172 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48180 \begin_inset space ~
48188 \begin_layout Section
48192 \begin_layout Standard
48193 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48195 Program Code Listings
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48208 \begin_layout Section
48212 \begin_layout Standard
48213 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48221 set to be used and set the
48226 The itemize environment is described in section
48227 \begin_inset space ~
48231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48233 reference "sec:Itemize"
48240 \begin_layout Standard
48241 You can furthermore specify a
48244 \begin_inset space ~
48249 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48250 command of the desired character.
48251 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48258 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48264 \begin_inset space \space{}
48268 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48278 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48279 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48282 \begin_layout Standard
48283 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48291 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48292 -packages in the preamble (menu
48295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48296 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48299 \begin_inset space ~
48305 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48309 usepackage{textcomp}
48312 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48316 usepackage{amssymb}
48326 \begin_layout Section
48330 \begin_layout Standard
48331 Branches are described in section
48332 \begin_inset space ~
48336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48338 reference "sec:Branches"
48345 \begin_layout Section
48347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48349 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48356 \begin_layout Standard
48357 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48360 \begin_layout Description
48362 \begin_inset space ~
48366 \begin_inset space ~
48369 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48389 View Master Document
48390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48397 Update Master Document
48398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48405 menu or the toolbar.
48406 The default is set in
48408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48409 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48414 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48418 \begin_inset space ~
48422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48424 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48431 \begin_layout Description
48433 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48439 \begin_inset space ~
48443 \begin_inset space ~
48446 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48451 option which is needed with some packages.
48452 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48453 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48456 \begin_layout Description
48458 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48460 \begin_inset space ~
48464 \begin_inset space ~
48467 Options offers settings for the
48475 \begin_layout Itemize
48479 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48481 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48483 \begin_inset space ~
48489 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48491 \begin_inset space ~
48495 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48501 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48503 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48504 settings for the menu
48506 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48510 \begin_inset space ~
48514 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48517 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48518 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48523 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48525 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48527 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48530 or a detailed description see section
48532 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48537 \begin_inset space ~
48543 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48547 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48551 \begin_layout Itemize
48553 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48556 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48558 determines whether so-called
48559 \begin_inset Quotes els
48563 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48567 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48569 \begin_inset Quotes els
48573 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48576 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48577 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48578 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48580 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48582 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48583 macros, you can uncheck this.
48584 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48591 \begin_layout Description
48593 \begin_inset space ~
48597 \begin_inset space ~
48600 Options offers settings for the export format
48608 \begin_inset space ~
48613 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48617 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48621 \begin_inset space ~
48626 settings are described in detail in section
48628 Math Output in XHTML
48633 \begin_inset space ~
48642 \begin_inset space ~
48646 \begin_inset space ~
48651 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48654 \begin_layout Description
48656 \begin_inset space ~
48661 Save transient properties
48663 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48664 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48665 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48669 \begin_layout Itemize
48670 the activation of change tracking
48673 \begin_layout Itemize
48674 the output of tracked changes
48677 \begin_layout Itemize
48678 the recording of the document directory path.
48681 \begin_layout Standard
48682 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48683 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48687 \begin_layout Section
48695 \begin_layout Standard
48696 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48698 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48700 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48702 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48706 \begin_layout Standard
48707 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48708 -syntax is given in section
48709 \begin_inset space ~
48713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48715 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48722 \begin_layout Chapter
48728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48730 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48735 \begin_inset Index idx
48738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48747 \begin_layout Standard
48748 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48750 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48754 It has the following submenus.
48757 \begin_layout Section
48761 \begin_layout Subsection
48765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48766 User Interface File
48767 \begin_inset Index idx
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48771 Customization ! of toolbars
48777 \begin_inset Index idx
48780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 Customization ! of menus
48789 \begin_layout Standard
48790 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48791 interface (ui) file.
48792 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48800 \begin_layout Description
48805 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48808 \begin_layout Description
48815 the menu entries in popup context menus
48818 \begin_layout Description
48823 specifies the toolbar buttons
48826 \begin_layout Standard
48827 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48828 and edit the entries.
48831 \begin_layout Standard
48832 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48844 entries must be finished with an explicit
48869 and in the case of the
48870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48882 The syntax for the entries is:
48885 \begin_layout Standard
48886 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48915 \begin_layout Standard
48917 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48920 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48921 -functions are listed in the menu
48923 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48933 \begin_layout Standard
48934 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48940 \begin_layout Standard
48941 For example, assuming you use the menu
48943 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48946 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48950 \begin_layout Standard
48951 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48975 \begin_layout Standard
48977 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48992 to have the sixth bookmark.
48995 \begin_layout Standard
48999 \begin_inset space ~
49004 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49005 's toolbar buttons.
49006 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49010 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49022 \begin_layout Standard
49025 Enable tool tips in main work area
49027 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49035 \begin_layout Standard
49040 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49041 should display in the menu
49043 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49045 \begin_inset space ~
49053 \begin_layout Subsection
49057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49061 \begin_layout Standard
49064 Restore window layouts and geometries
49067 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49068 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49072 \begin_layout Standard
49075 Restore cursor positions
49077 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49081 \begin_layout Standard
49084 Load opened files from last session
49086 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49090 \begin_layout Standard
49093 Clear all session information
49095 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49096 sessions (cursor positions, names
49097 of last opened documents, etc.).
49100 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49104 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49109 \begin_inset Index idx
49112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49121 \begin_layout Standard
49124 Backup original documents when saving
49126 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49127 it was saved the last time.
49128 It is stored in the
49131 \begin_inset space ~
49137 \begin_inset space ~
49141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49143 reference "sec:Paths"
49147 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49150 \begin_inset space ~
49156 The backup file has the file extension
49157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49171 \begin_layout Standard
49174 Backup documents, every
49176 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49179 \begin_layout Standard
49182 Save documents compressed by default
49184 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49185 \begin_inset space ~
49189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49191 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49196 This applies to newly created documents only.
49197 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49201 Windows & work area
49204 \begin_layout Standard
49207 Open documents in tabs
49209 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49213 \begin_layout Standard
49218 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49225 \begin_inset space ~
49229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49231 reference "sec:Paths"
49235 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49242 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49243 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49244 of \SpecialChar LyX
49246 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49247 instance is created for each file.
49250 \begin_layout Standard
49253 Single close-tab button
49255 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49265 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49266 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49267 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49271 \begin_layout Standard
49272 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49280 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49281 before the change takes effect.
49289 \begin_layout Standard
49294 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49296 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49298 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49302 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49303 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49304 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49307 \begin_layout Subsection
49309 \begin_inset Index idx
49312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49321 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49328 \begin_layout Standard
49329 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49333 \begin_layout Standard
49334 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49342 This section only deals with the fonts
49346 the \SpecialChar LyX
49348 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49363 \begin_layout Standard
49364 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49381 (depends on the system) as its
49384 \begin_inset space ~
49400 \begin_layout Standard
49401 You can change the font size with the
49408 \begin_layout Standard
49413 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49418 points have the size of 1
49419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49423 \begin_inset space ~
49427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49429 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49434 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49439 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49440 \begin_inset space ~
49444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49446 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49453 \begin_layout Subsection
49455 \begin_inset Index idx
49458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49459 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49466 \begin_inset Index idx
49469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49478 \begin_layout Standard
49479 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49480 by choosing an item in the
49481 list and selecting the
49488 \begin_layout Standard
49489 By checking the option
49493 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49496 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49497 \begin_inset space ~
49501 \begin_inset space ~
49506 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49509 \begin_layout Subsection
49511 \begin_inset Index idx
49514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49523 \begin_layout Standard
49524 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49528 \begin_layout Standard
49533 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49534 This feature is described in section
49535 \begin_inset space ~
49539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49541 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49548 \begin_layout Standard
49549 Checking the option
49552 \begin_inset space ~
49556 \begin_inset space ~
49560 \begin_inset space ~
49565 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49568 \begin_layout Section
49570 \begin_inset Index idx
49573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49582 \begin_layout Subsection
49586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49590 \begin_layout Standard
49593 Cursor follows scrollbar
49595 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49599 \begin_layout Standard
49600 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49601 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49602 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49605 \begin_layout Standard
49608 Scroll below end of document
49610 is self-explanatory.
49613 \begin_layout Standard
49614 In \SpecialChar LyX
49615 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49622 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49624 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49625 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49626 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49630 \begin_layout Standard
49632 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49635 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49637 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49638 paste operations (i.
49639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49642 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49643 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49644 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49645 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49646 dissolving from insets.
49651 \begin_layout Standard
49654 Sort environments alphabetically
49656 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49659 \begin_layout Standard
49662 Group environments by their category
49664 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49667 \begin_layout Standard
49672 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49687 \begin_layout Standard
49688 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49693 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49694 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49698 \begin_layout Subsection
49700 \begin_inset Index idx
49703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49710 \begin_inset Index idx
49713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49714 Settings ! Shortcuts
49722 \begin_layout Standard
49727 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49729 Several binding files are available, among them:
49732 \begin_layout Description
49733 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49736 \begin_layout Description
49737 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49749 \begin_layout Description
49750 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49761 \begin_layout Standard
49762 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49767 , and binding files for special languages.
49768 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49773 \begin_inset space \space{}
49777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49785 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49786 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49787 will try to use the appropriate binding
49791 \begin_layout Standard
49792 Some binding files, like
49796 , only have a limited scope.
49797 When looking at the end of the file
49801 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49804 \begin_layout Standard
49808 \begin_inset space ~
49812 \begin_inset space ~
49817 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49818 in the selected key binding file.
49821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49825 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49830 \begin_inset Index idx
49833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49834 Key Bindings ! Editing
49842 \begin_layout Standard
49843 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49844 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49845 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49846 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49849 Show key-bindings containing
49852 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49853 Insert there for example as keyword
49854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49861 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49862 functions that contain
49863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49871 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49872 All \SpecialChar LyX
49873 functions are also listed in the file
49878 that you will find in the
49885 \begin_layout Standard
49886 For example, to add the shortcut
49894 , select the function and press the
49899 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49900 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49903 \begin_layout Standard
49904 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49905 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49907 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49908 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49910 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49915 \begin_layout Standard
49916 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49919 \begin_layout Standard
49920 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49922 The syntax of the entries is:
49925 \begin_layout Standard
49931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49950 \begin_layout Standard
49951 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49952 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49980 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49981 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49982 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49983 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49985 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49989 , you needed to specify it as
49994 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49997 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50000 \begin_layout Subsection
50002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50004 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50009 \begin_inset Index idx
50012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50019 \begin_inset Index idx
50022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50023 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50031 \begin_layout Standard
50032 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50033 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50034 provides keyboard maps.
50035 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50036 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50039 \begin_inset space ~
50043 \begin_inset space ~
50048 and select the keyboard map file named
50055 \begin_layout Standard
50064 keyboard map and, if you use the
50068 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50071 arg "keymap-primary"
50077 arg "keymap-secondary"
50080 respectively or toggle between them with
50083 arg "keymap-toggle"
50089 \begin_layout Standard
50090 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50098 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50107 \begin_layout Standard
50108 You can also specify the mouse
50110 Wheel scrolling speed
50113 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50117 Middle mouse button pasting
50119 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50120 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50123 \begin_layout Standard
50131 \begin_inset space ~
50135 \begin_inset space ~
50140 you can select a key for zooming.
50141 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50144 \begin_layout Subsection
50148 \begin_layout Standard
50149 Input completion is described in section
50150 \begin_inset space ~
50154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50156 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50163 \begin_layout Section
50165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50172 \begin_inset Index idx
50175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50182 \begin_inset Index idx
50185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50194 \begin_layout Standard
50195 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50196 are normally determined during
50198 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50201 \begin_layout Description
50203 \begin_inset space ~
50206 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50207 's working directory.
50208 It is the default when you
50219 \begin_inset space ~
50227 \begin_layout Description
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50232 templates This directory
50233 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50234 contains the templates that are shown
50235 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50236 will be opened when you use the menu
50237 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50242 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50244 \begin_inset space ~
50248 \begin_inset space ~
50256 \begin_layout Description
50258 \begin_inset space ~
50261 files This directory
50262 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50263 will be opened when you use the
50264 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50265 contains the example files that are listed in
50268 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50277 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50279 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50281 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50287 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50289 \begin_inset Newline newline
50293 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50305 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50306 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50316 \begin_layout Description
50318 \begin_inset space ~
50322 \begin_inset Index idx
50325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50331 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50332 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50333 \begin_inset space ~
50337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50339 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50347 will be used to save the backups.
50348 \begin_inset Newline newline
50351 Backup files have the ending
50352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50362 \begin_layout Description
50364 \begin_inset space ~
50367 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50368 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50370 \begin_inset Newline newline
50377 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50383 You can edit this file with the program
50392 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50393 in its preferences under
50396 \begin_inset space ~
50402 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50407 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50409 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50410 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50416 and \SpecialChar LyX
50417 need to be running the same time.
50418 \begin_inset Newline newline
50421 The pipe is also used for the
50425 feature, see section
50426 \begin_inset space ~
50430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50432 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50437 \begin_inset Newline newline
50440 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50441 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50442 \begin_inset Newline newline
50458 \begin_layout Description
50460 \begin_inset space ~
50463 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50466 \begin_layout Description
50468 \begin_inset space ~
50471 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50472 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50473 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50476 \begin_layout Description
50478 \begin_inset space ~
50481 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50487 You only need to specify it if you are using
50491 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50493 For \SpecialChar LyX
50498 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50502 \begin_layout Description
50504 \begin_inset space ~
50507 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50508 When \SpecialChar LyX
50509 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50510 to find it on the system.
50511 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50513 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50522 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50523 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50526 \begin_layout Description
50528 \begin_inset space ~
50531 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50532 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50533 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50534 code or in the document
50536 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50538 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50539 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50540 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50541 scanned for the input files.
50542 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50543 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50545 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50546 compilation may fail for some documents.
50549 \begin_layout Section
50553 \begin_layout Standard
50554 Here you can insert your
50563 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50565 \begin_inset space ~
50569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50571 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50575 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50578 \begin_layout Section
50580 \begin_inset Index idx
50583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50584 Language ! Settings
50590 \begin_inset Index idx
50593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50594 Settings ! Language
50602 \begin_layout Subsection
50604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50606 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50613 \begin_layout Description
50615 \begin_inset space ~
50619 \begin_inset space ~
50622 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50624 You can find its actual translation status here:
50625 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50627 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50633 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50637 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50639 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50640 LaTeX Language Support
50645 \begin_layout Description
50647 \begin_inset space ~
50650 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50651 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50652 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50653 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50670 The most widespread language package is
50675 \begin_inset Index idx
50678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50685 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50687 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50688 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50689 come with the alternative
50695 \begin_inset Index idx
50698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50700 packages ! polyglossia
50705 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50706 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50712 The available selections are described in section
50713 \begin_inset space ~
50717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50719 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50726 \begin_layout Description
50728 \begin_inset space ~
50732 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50733 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50734 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50736 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50740 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50744 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50746 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50750 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50751 that is used to switch to a different language
50752 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50753 to start the package
50757 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50758 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50762 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50763 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50766 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50778 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50786 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50789 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50791 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50813 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50814 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50821 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50822 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50827 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50832 , this setting is ignored.
50837 \begin_layout Description
50839 \begin_inset space ~
50843 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50850 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50851 Use this if the language switch set in
50855 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50859 's alternative command
50863 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50864 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50867 end{otherlanguage*}
50871 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50872 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50873 command toggles the package on and off
50874 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50875 Empty by default, as
50879 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50881 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50886 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50892 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50897 , this setting is ignored.
50902 \begin_layout Description
50904 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50906 \begin_inset space ~
50910 \begin_inset space ~
50913 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50917 \begin_layout Description
50919 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50921 \begin_inset space ~
50925 \begin_inset space ~
50928 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50934 \begin_layout Description
50936 \begin_inset space ~
50940 \begin_inset space ~
50944 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50946 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50949 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50950 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50953 to the document class options
50954 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50955 rather than the language package options.
50956 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50960 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50961 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50963 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50964 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50966 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50971 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50972 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50981 \begin_layout Description
50983 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50985 \begin_inset space ~
50989 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50991 \begin_inset space ~
50995 \begin_inset space ~
50999 \begin_inset space ~
51005 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51007 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51010 this option is set,
51011 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51012 the language switch defined in
51015 \begin_inset space ~
51020 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51021 to the document language.
51022 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51023 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51026 \begin_inset space ~
51031 or if a package resets the document language.
51032 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51033 usually should be the document language).
51034 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51035 documents start with the chosen document language.
51036 When this option is not set, the
51039 \begin_inset space ~
51044 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51046 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51049 \begin_inset space ~
51059 \begin_layout Description
51061 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51063 \begin_inset space ~
51067 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51069 \begin_inset space ~
51073 \begin_inset space ~
51077 \begin_inset space ~
51083 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51087 \begin_inset space ~
51091 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51092 Set document language explicitly
51098 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51100 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51106 \begin_inset space ~
51112 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51114 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51118 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51120 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51123 the end of the document.
51124 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51129 \paragraph_spacing single
51131 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51137 \begin_layout Description
51139 \begin_inset space ~
51143 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51145 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51149 \begin_inset space ~
51153 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51155 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51157 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51161 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51164 in a language different
51165 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51167 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51170 the document language will be
51171 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51172 marked (by default with a blue
51175 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51177 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51181 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51185 \begin_layout Description
51187 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51189 \begin_inset space ~
51193 \begin_inset space ~
51197 \begin_inset space ~
51200 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51201 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51202 switched via the operating system.
51203 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51208 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51209 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51214 \begin_layout Description
51216 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51218 \begin_inset space ~
51222 \begin_inset space ~
51225 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51226 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51231 \begin_layout Description
51233 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51235 \begin_inset space ~
51239 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51241 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51245 \begin_inset space ~
51249 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51250 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51251 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51253 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51257 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51259 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51260 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51262 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51263 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51264 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51266 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51271 \begin_layout Standard
51276 means that the cursor
51277 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51278 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51279 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51284 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51285 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51289 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51291 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51292 specific case always means: move
51296 in text (even if this means:
51302 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51303 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51304 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51305 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51306 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51318 \begin_layout Standard
51320 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51325 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51326 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51327 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51331 ) when coming from the left.
51332 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51334 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51335 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51336 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51343 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51347 \begin_layout Description
51349 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51351 \begin_inset space ~
51355 \begin_inset space ~
51358 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51359 separator alignment).
51360 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51365 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51366 (static) custom character here.
51369 \begin_layout Description
51371 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51373 \begin_inset space ~
51377 \begin_inset space ~
51380 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51386 \begin_layout Subsection
51390 \begin_layout Standard
51391 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51392 \begin_inset space ~
51396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51398 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51405 \begin_layout Section
51409 \begin_layout Subsection
51411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51413 name "subsec:General-output"
51420 \begin_layout Description
51422 \begin_inset space ~
51425 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51427 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51429 \begin_inset space ~
51435 For a detailed description see section
51437 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51442 \begin_inset space ~
51450 \begin_layout Description
51452 \begin_inset space ~
51455 Options Options for the program
51459 that is used for the export format
51464 \begin_inset space ~
51468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51470 reference "subsec:Export"
51475 Possible options are listed in the
51480 \begin_inset Newline newline
51484 \begin_inset Flex URL
51487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51489 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51499 \begin_layout Description
51501 \begin_inset space ~
51505 \begin_inset space ~
51508 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51511 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51512 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51514 \begin_inset space ~
51520 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51523 \begin_layout Description
51525 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51527 \begin_inset space ~
51531 \begin_inset Index idx
51534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51541 \begin_inset Index idx
51544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51545 Settings ! Date format
51550 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51551 \begin_inset Newline newline
51555 \begin_inset Flex URL
51558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51560 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51566 \begin_inset Newline newline
51569 For example the format
51570 \begin_inset Newline newline
51574 \begin_inset Newline newline
51577 prints the date as day/month/year.
51582 \begin_layout Description
51584 \begin_inset space ~
51588 \begin_inset space ~
51591 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51592 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51595 \begin_layout Subsection
51601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51603 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51608 \begin_inset Index idx
51611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51612 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51621 \begin_layout Description
51623 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51625 \begin_inset space ~
51633 \begin_inset space ~
51637 \begin_inset space ~
51640 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51645 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51666 are used for Cyrillic.
51667 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51680 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51682 sets up in the background.
51683 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51688 \begin_layout Description
51690 \begin_inset space ~
51694 \begin_inset space ~
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51702 \begin_inset space ~
51705 options They only have an effect when the program
51709 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51712 \begin_layout Standard
51713 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51714 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51715 manuals of the applications.
51718 \begin_layout Description
51720 \begin_inset space ~
51723 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51724 \begin_inset space ~
51728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51730 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51737 \begin_layout Description
51739 \begin_inset space ~
51742 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51743 \begin_inset space ~
51747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51749 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51756 \begin_layout Description
51758 \begin_inset space ~
51761 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51762 \begin_inset space ~
51766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51768 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51775 \begin_layout Description
51781 \begin_inset space ~
51784 command Command for the program
51786 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51789 that is described in the section
51791 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51796 Additional Features
51801 \begin_layout Standard
51802 There are additionally the following options:
51805 \begin_layout Description
51807 \begin_inset space ~
51811 \begin_inset space ~
51815 \begin_inset space ~
51819 \begin_inset space ~
51824 \begin_inset space ~
51827 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51845 to separate folders.
51846 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51848 \begin_inset Index idx
51851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51858 \begin_inset Index idx
51861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51870 \begin_layout Description
51872 \begin_inset space ~
51876 \begin_inset space ~
51880 \begin_inset space ~
51884 \begin_inset space ~
51888 \begin_inset space ~
51892 \begin_inset space ~
51895 changes Removes all manually set
51901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51902 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51904 \begin_inset space ~
51909 dialog when changing the document class.
51912 \begin_layout Section
51914 \begin_inset space ~
51918 \begin_inset Index idx
51921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51930 \begin_layout Subsection
51932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51934 name "subsec:Converters"
51939 \begin_inset Index idx
51942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51951 \begin_layout Standard
51952 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51953 from one format to another.
51954 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51955 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51962 \begin_inset space ~
51967 field and press the
51972 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51976 \begin_inset space ~
51981 drop-down list, modify the
51985 field and press the
51992 \begin_layout Standard
51995 Converter File Cache
52001 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52003 Maximum Age (in days
52006 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52007 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52010 \begin_layout Standard
52011 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52012 definition, is described in the section
52023 \begin_layout Subsection
52025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52027 name "sec:File-Formats"
52032 \begin_inset Index idx
52035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52042 \begin_inset Index idx
52045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52054 \begin_layout Standard
52055 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52065 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52068 \begin_layout Standard
52069 You can also define the
52071 Default output format
52073 that is used when you use
52075 View, Update, View Master Document
52079 Update Master Document
52085 menu or the toolbar.
52088 \begin_layout Standard
52089 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52100 \begin_layout Standard
52101 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52103 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52104 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52105 This is done by specifying a
52110 More about this is described in the section
52121 \begin_layout Chapter
52122 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52124 \begin_inset Index idx
52127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52136 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52143 \begin_layout Standard
52145 \begin_inset space ~
52149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52151 reference "tab:Units"
52155 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52156 and used in this documentation.
52159 \begin_layout Standard
52160 \begin_inset Float table
52167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52168 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52186 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52194 \begin_inset Tabular
52195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52196 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52198 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52352 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52623 scaled point (65536
52624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52691 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52815 % of original image width
52820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52904 \begin_layout Standard
52905 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52908 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52915 \begin_layout Bibliography
52916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52917 LatexCommand bibitem
52924 The \SpecialChar LyX
52926 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52929 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52935 \begin_inset Newline newline
52939 \begin_inset Flex URL
52942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52944 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52952 \begin_layout Bibliography
52953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52954 LatexCommand bibitem
52955 key "latexcompanion"
52960 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52962 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52963 Companion Second Edition.
52966 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52969 \begin_layout Bibliography
52970 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52971 LatexCommand bibitem
52977 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52980 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52984 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52987 \begin_layout Bibliography
52988 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52989 LatexCommand bibitem
52998 : A Document Preparation System.
53001 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53004 \begin_layout Bibliography
53005 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53006 LatexCommand bibitem
53016 The \SpecialChar TeX
53020 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53023 \begin_layout Bibliography
53024 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53025 LatexCommand bibitem
53031 The \SpecialChar TeX
53033 \begin_inset Newline newline
53037 \begin_inset Flex URL
53040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53042 https://ctan.org/topic
53050 \begin_layout Bibliography
53051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53052 LatexCommand bibitem
53058 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53060 \begin_inset Newline newline
53064 \begin_inset Flex URL
53067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53069 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53077 \begin_layout Bibliography
53078 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53079 LatexCommand bibitem
53086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53088 name "Documentation"
53089 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53096 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53100 \begin_inset Newline newline
53104 \begin_inset Flex URL
53107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53109 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53117 \begin_layout Bibliography
53118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53119 LatexCommand bibitem
53126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53128 name "Documentation"
53129 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53134 how to use the program
53136 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53140 \begin_inset Newline newline
53144 \begin_inset Flex URL
53147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53149 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53157 \begin_layout Bibliography
53158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53159 LatexCommand bibitem
53166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53168 name "Documentation"
53169 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53174 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53180 \begin_inset Index idx
53183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53185 packages ! biblatex
53191 \begin_inset Newline newline
53195 \begin_inset Flex URL
53198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53200 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53208 \begin_layout Bibliography
53209 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53210 LatexCommand bibitem
53217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53219 name "Documentation"
53220 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53225 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53231 \begin_inset Index idx
53234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53242 \begin_inset Newline newline
53246 \begin_inset Flex URL
53249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53251 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53259 \begin_layout Bibliography
53260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53261 LatexCommand bibitem
53268 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53270 name "Documentation"
53271 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53281 \begin_inset Newline newline
53285 \begin_inset Flex URL
53288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53290 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53298 \begin_layout Bibliography
53299 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53300 LatexCommand bibitem
53301 key "makeindex-man"
53307 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53310 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53320 \begin_inset Newline newline
53324 \begin_inset Flex URL
53327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53329 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53337 \begin_layout Bibliography
53338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53339 LatexCommand bibitem
53346 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53348 name "Documentation"
53349 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53359 \begin_inset Newline newline
53363 \begin_inset Flex URL
53366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53368 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53376 \begin_layout Bibliography
53377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53378 LatexCommand bibitem
53385 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53387 name "Documentation"
53388 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53393 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53395 \begin_inset Newline newline
53399 \begin_inset Flex URL
53402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53404 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53412 \begin_layout Bibliography
53413 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53414 LatexCommand bibitem
53421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53423 name "Documentation"
53424 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53429 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53435 \begin_inset Index idx
53438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53446 \begin_inset Newline newline
53450 \begin_inset Flex URL
53453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53455 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53463 \begin_layout Bibliography
53464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53465 LatexCommand bibitem
53472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53474 name "Documentation"
53475 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53480 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53486 \begin_inset Index idx
53489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53491 packages ! enumitem
53497 \begin_inset Newline newline
53501 \begin_inset Flex URL
53504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53506 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53514 \begin_layout Bibliography
53515 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53516 LatexCommand bibitem
53523 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53525 name "Documentation"
53526 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53531 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53537 \begin_inset Index idx
53540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53542 packages ! fancyhdr
53548 \begin_inset Newline newline
53552 \begin_inset Flex URL
53555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53557 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53565 \begin_layout Bibliography
53566 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53567 LatexCommand bibitem
53574 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53576 name "Documentation"
53577 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53582 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53588 \begin_inset Index idx
53591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53593 packages ! hyperref
53599 \begin_inset Newline newline
53603 \begin_inset Flex URL
53606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53608 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53616 \begin_layout Bibliography
53617 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53618 LatexCommand bibitem
53625 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53627 name "Documentation"
53628 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53633 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53639 \begin_inset Index idx
53642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53644 packages ! microtype
53650 \begin_inset Newline newline
53654 \begin_inset Flex URL
53657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53659 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53667 \begin_layout Bibliography
53668 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53669 LatexCommand bibitem
53676 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53678 name "Documentation"
53679 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53684 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53690 \begin_inset Index idx
53693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53701 \begin_inset Newline newline
53705 \begin_inset Flex URL
53708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53710 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53718 \begin_layout Bibliography
53719 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53720 LatexCommand bibitem
53727 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53729 name "Documentation"
53730 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53735 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53741 \begin_inset Index idx
53744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53746 packages ! prettyref
53752 \begin_inset Newline newline
53756 \begin_inset Flex URL
53759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53761 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53769 \begin_layout Bibliography
53770 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53771 LatexCommand bibitem
53778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53780 name "Documentation"
53781 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53786 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53792 \begin_inset Index idx
53795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53797 packages ! refstyle
53803 \begin_inset Newline newline
53807 \begin_inset Flex URL
53810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53812 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53820 \begin_layout Bibliography
53821 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53822 LatexCommand bibitem
53829 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53832 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53837 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53839 \begin_inset Newline newline
53843 \begin_inset Flex URL
53846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53848 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53856 \begin_layout Bibliography
53857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53858 LatexCommand bibitem
53865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53868 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53873 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53875 \begin_inset Newline newline
53879 \begin_inset Flex URL
53882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53884 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53892 \begin_layout Bibliography
53893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53894 LatexCommand bibitem
53901 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53904 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53909 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53910 for Cyrillic languages:
53911 \begin_inset Newline newline
53915 \begin_inset Flex URL
53918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53920 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53928 \begin_layout Bibliography
53929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53930 LatexCommand bibitem
53937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53940 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53945 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53947 \begin_inset Newline newline
53951 \begin_inset Flex URL
53954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53956 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53964 \begin_layout Bibliography
53965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53966 LatexCommand bibitem
53973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53976 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53981 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53983 \begin_inset Newline newline
53987 \begin_inset Flex URL
53990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53992 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54000 \begin_layout Bibliography
54001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54002 LatexCommand bibitem
54009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54012 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54017 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54019 \begin_inset Newline newline
54023 \begin_inset Flex URL
54026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54028 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54036 \begin_layout Standard
54037 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54071 \begin_inset Note Note
54074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54081 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54082 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54083 bibliography is the second one:
54091 \begin_layout Standard
54092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54093 LatexCommand bibtex
54094 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54095 options "biblio/alphadin"
54102 \begin_layout Standard
54103 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54107 \begin_layout Standard
54111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54117 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54126 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54134 \begin_inset Note Note
54137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54138 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54139 \begin_inset space ~
54143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54145 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54157 \begin_layout Standard
54158 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54159 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54165 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54166 LatexCommand printindex